HomeMy WebLinkAboutDiamond Bar Center Specifications - Update1293492.1
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
CALIFORNIA
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
CITY PROJECT NO. FP23500 & FP23501
All Questions Regarding This Project Are to Be Directed To:
Mr. David G. Liu, P.E.
Director of Public Works
City of Diamond Bar
(909) 839-7040
Stan Liu, Mayor
Chia Yu Teng, Mayor Pro Tem
Andrew Chou, Council Member
Ruth M. Low, Council Member
Steve Tye, Council Member
Daniel Fox, City Manager
MONTH YEAR
1293492.1
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
CITY PROJECT NO. FP23500 & FP23501
By:
Terry Matthew Evans, Architect C33095 Date
Exp: 11/30/25
PREPARED BY: PBLA Engineering, INC.
1481 Ford Street
Redlands, CA 92373
TELEPHONE: (888)714-9642
The City of Diamond Bar, California will receive proposals through PlanteBids, until 2pm,
September 5, 2024, for the performance of the above described services.
08-08-24
1293492.1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEMS PAGES
PART I - BIDDING AND CONTRACTUAL DOCUMENTS
NOTICE INVITING SEALED BIDS 1 - 2
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS 3 - 10
PROPOSAL FORM 11 - 12
BID SCHEDULE 13 - 15
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 16 - 17
DECLARATION OF ELIGIBILITY TO CONTRACT 18 - 19
BIDDER'S VIOLATION OF LAW/SAFETY QUESTIONNAIRE 20
CONTRACTOR INDUSTRIAL SAFETY RECORD 21
AFFIDAVIT FOR CO-PARTNERSHIP FIRM 22
AFFIDAVIT FOR CORPORATION BIDDER 23
AFFIDAVIT FOR INDIVIDUAL BIDDER 24
AFFIDAVIT FOR JOINT VENTURE 25
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND 26 - 27
LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND 28 - 29
BID BOND 30 - 31
CERTIFICATE OF NON-DISCRIMINATION
AND AFFIRMATIVE ACTION
CERTIFICATE WITH REGARD TO THE PERFORMANCE
OF PREVIOUS CONTRACTS AND SUBCONTRACTS 1
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 2
CONTRACT AGREEMENT 3 - 9
1293492.1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Continued)
PART II - GENERAL PROVISIONS GP-1 – GP-13
PART III- SPECIAL PROVISIONS SP-1 – SP-7
PART IV - TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
TP-1 – TP-2
PBLA TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART V - APPENDICES
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION (C&D) DEBRIS PLAN
1293492.1
PART I
BIDDING AND CONTRACTUAL
DOCUMENTS
1
1293492.1
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
NOTICE INVITING SEALED BIDS
FOR DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
CITY PROJECT NO. FP23500 & FP23501
RECEIPT OF PROPOSALS: Sealed proposals will be received at the office of the City
Clerk, City Hall, Diamond Bar, California, until 2:00 pm Pacific Standard Time on or
before Thursday, June 26, 2025 for the furnishing of all labor and materials and equipment
for the Diamond Bar Center Improvements and other incidental and appurtenant work. All
bids or proposals shall be submitted through the City’s electronic bid management system
(PlanetBids) at https://www.planetbids.com/portal/portal.cfm?CompanyID=39500. At the
time of contract award, the Contractor shall possess a State of California Class A
Contractor’s License or a combination of Class C Specialty Contractor’s License(s)
adequate to perform the work herein described and be registered with the Department of
Industrial Relations per California Labor Code Section 1771.1. All subcontractors shall have
equivalent licenses for their specific trades. The Contractor and all subcontractors shall have
a valid City of Diamond Bar business license prior to commencing any work. The proposals
will be publicly opened and read during an online webinar. Webinar details will be published
on the City’s electronic bid management system (PlanetBids) at
https://www.planetbids.com/portal/portal.cfm?CompanyID=39500.
MANDATORY PRE-BID MEETING: A mandatory pre-bid meeting will be held at the 1600
Grand Ave. Diamond Bar 91765 on June 4, 2025 at 9:00am.
QUESTIONS: All questions must be submitted via Planet Bids, no later than June 12, 2025
at 3pm.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work to be performed or executed under these plans and
specifications consists of and includes new entry, new doors and hardware and lighting
improvements; and other incidental and appurtenant work necessary for the proper
construction of the contemplated improvements, as indicated on the project plans for
Diamond Bar Center improvement Project.
COMPLETION OF WORK: All work shall be completed within eighty (80) working days
after the Notice to Proceed is issued by the City and all work within the ballroom must be
completed between September 8 and October 10, 2025
ENGINEER'S ESTIMATE: The Diamond Bar Center Improvement Project is estimated to
cost $854,000, all in accordance with the provisions of the Plans, Specifications, Notices
and Instructions to Bidders.
OBTAINING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Any requests for hardcopy plans, specifications,
and all contract documents may be obtained by a public records request at the office of the
City Clerk, City Hall, 21810 Copley Drive, Diamond Bar, California 91765. A fee may be
assessed for printing, mailing, and other costs to reproduce these records.
PROPOSAL GUARANTEE: Each proposal must be accompanied by cash or by a cashier's
or certified check or by a bid bond in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the bid price payable
to the City of Diamond Bar as a guarantee that the bidder, if his proposal is accepted, will
2
1293492.1
promptly execute the contract, secure payment of Workmen's Compensation Insurance,
furnish a satisfactory Faithful Performance Bond in the amount of one hundred percent
(100%) of the total bid price, and a Labor and Material Bond in an amount not less than one
hundred percent (100%) of the contract price. Said bonds to be secured from a surety
company authorized to do business in the State of California, and subject to the approval of
the City Attorney. The original bid bond shall be submitted to the City Clerk prior to the bid
due date and time. Proof of delivery that is date/time stamped and signed for by the City
Clerk from other couriers other than Certified mail will be accepted. A copy of the proof of
delivery shall be submitted with the bid package by the bid due date.
MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS: Prospective bidders should examine the
minimum qualifications found in number 15 of the “Information for Bidders” section,
pages 4 through 8. Bidders who do not meet the minimum qualifications should not
submit a bid, as the bids will be considered nonresponsive.
PREVAILING WAGE RATE: As required by the California Labor Code, Section 1770 et seq.
the City Council of the City of Diamond Bar incorporates herein by reference the general
prevailing rate of per diem wages as determined by the Director of Industrial Relations of
the State of California. Copies of the prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file in the
office of the City Clerk and will be made available to any interested party upon request. In
accordance with the Labor Code, no workman employed upon work under this contract shall
be paid less than the above referenced prevailing wage rate. A copy of said rates shall be
posted at each job site during the course of construction.
CONTRACTOR shall forfeit, as penalty to CITY, not more than two hundred dollars
($200.00) for each laborer, workman or mechanic employed for each calendar day or portion
thereof, if such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the general prevailing rate
of wages hereinbefore stipulated for any work done under this AGREEMENT, by him or by
any subcontractor under him.
Any classification omitted herein shall be paid not less than the prevailing wage scale as
established for similar work in the particular area, and all overtime shall be paid at the
prevailing rates as established for the particular area. Sunday and holiday time shall be paid
at the wage rates determined by the Director of Industrial Relations.
CONTRACTOR and any of its subcontractors must be registered with the Department of
Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5, which precludes the award of a
contract for a public work on any public works project awarded after April 1, 2015. This
Agreement is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of
Industrial Relations.
PAYMENT: Payment will be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Specifications.
CITY'S RIGHTS RESERVED: The City of Diamond Bar reserves the right to reject any and
all proposals or bids, should it deem this necessary for the public good, and also the bid of
the bidder who has been delinquent or unfaithful in any former contract with the City of
Diamond Bar. No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of thirty (30) days after the date
of the bid opening.
3
1293492.1
BID AWARD: Subject to the reservations noted above, the contract will be awarded to the
lowest responsible bidder.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR, CALIFORNIA
DATE: 9/3/2024
By: David G. Liu, Director of Public Works
4
1293492.1
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
1.PREPARATION OF BID FORM: The City invites bids on the form attached to be
submitted at such time and place as is stated in the Notice Inviting Sealed Bids. All
bids should be made in accordance with the provisions of the Standard Specifications
for Public Works Construction, 2021 Edition (with all supplements). All blanks on the
bid form must be appropriately filled in. All bids shall be submitted in sealed
envelopes bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, his address, and the name
of the project for which the bid is submitted. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder
to see that the bid is received in the proper time. Any bid received after the scheduled
closing time for receipt of bids will be returned to the bidder unopened.
2.PROPOSAL GUARANTEE: Each proposal shall be accompanied by cash or by a
cashier's or certified check or by a bid bond in the amount of not less than ten percent
(10%) of the amount named in the proposal. Said check or bond shall be made
payable to the City Clerk of the City of Diamond Bar and shall be given as a guarantee
that the bidder, if awarded the work, will enter into a contract within ten (10) days after
written notice of the award and will furnish the necessary bonds as hereinafter
provided. In case of refusal or failure to enter said contract, the check or bond, as
the case may be, shall be forfeited to the City. No bidder's bond will be accepted
unless it conforms substantially to the form furnished by the City, which is bound
herein, and is properly filled out and executed.
3.SIGNATURE: The bid must be signed in the name of the bidder and must bear the
signature in longhand of the person or persons duly authorized to sign the bid on
behalf of the bidder.
4.MODIFICATIONS: Changes in or addition to the bid form, recapitulations of the work
bid upon, alternative proposals or any other modifications of the bid form which is not
specifically called for in the contract documents may result in the Owner's rejection
of the bid as not being responsive to the invitation to bid. No oral or telephonic
modification of any bid submitted will be considered. The bid submitted must not
contain any erasures, interlineation, or other corrections unless each such correction
is suitably authenticated by affixing in the margin immediately opposite the correction
the surname or surnames of the person or persons signing the bid.
5.DISCREPANCIES IN THE PROPOSALS: In case of discrepancy between words
and figures, the words shall prevail. If the amounts bid on individual items (if called
for) do not in fact add to the total amount shown by the bidder, the correctly added
total of the individual items shall prevail over the total figure shown. The estimated
quantities and amounts are for the purpose of comparison of bids only. The City
Council of the City of Diamond Bar reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to
waive any irregularity or informality in any bid to the extent permitted by law.
6.BIDDER'S EXAMINATION OF SITE: Each bidder shall examine carefully the site of
the proposed work and the contract documents therefore. It will be assumed that the
bidder has investigated and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered as to
the character, quality, and quantity of materials to be furnished, and as to the
5
1293492.1
requirements of the contract, specifications and drawings. The name of the individual
who examined the site of the work and the date of such examination shall be stated
in the proposal.
By submitting a bid, the bidder will be held to have personally examined the site and
the drawings, to have carefully read the specifications, and to have satisfied himself
as to his ability to meet all the difficulties attending the execution of the proposed
contract before the delivery of his proposal, and agrees that if he is awarded the
contract, he will make no claim against the City of Diamond Bar based on ignorance
or misunderstanding of the contract provisions.
7.WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS: Any bidder may withdraw his bid either personally, by
written request, or by telegraphic request confirmed in the manner specified above at
any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids.
8.INSURANCE AND BONDS: The Contractor shall not commence work under this
contract until he has secured all insurance and bonds required under this section nor
shall he allow any subcontractor to commence work on this subcontract until all
similar insurance issued in compliance with this section shall be issued in the form,
and be an insurer of the insurers, satisfactory to and first approved by the City in
writing. Certificates of Insurance in the amounts required shall be furnished by the
Contractor to the City prior to the commencement of work.
The Contractor shall maintain adequate Workmen's Compensation Insurance under
the laws of the State of California for all labor employed by him or by any
subcontractor under him who may come within the protection of such Workmen's
Compensation Insurance laws.
The Contractor shall maintain public liability insurance to protect said Contractor and
the City against loss from liability imposed by law, for damages on account of bodily
injury, including death resulting therefrom, suffered or alleged to have been suffered
by any person or persons, other than employees, resulting directly or indirectly from
the performance or execution of this contract or any subcontract thereunder, and also
to protect said Contractor and the City against loss from liability imposed by law, for
damage to any property. Damage insurance shall be maintained by the Contractor
in full force and effect during the entire period of performance under this contract, in
the amount of not less than $2,000,000 for one person injured in the accident and in
the amount of not less than $2,000,000 for more than one person injured in one
accident and in the amount of not less than $1,000,000 with respect to any property
damage aforesaid.
The Contractor shall secure with a responsible corporate surety, or corporate
sureties, satisfactory bonds conditioned upon faithful performance by the Contractor
of all requirements under the contract and upon the payment of claims of materials,
men and laborers thereunder. The Faithful Performance Bond shall be in the sum of
not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the estimated aggregate amount of the
payment to be made under the contract computed on the basis of the prices stated
in the proposal. The Labor and Material Bond shall be in the sum of not less than
one hundred percent (100%) of the estimated aggregate amount of the payments to
6
1293492.1
be made under the contract computed on the basis of the prices stated in the
proposal.
9.INTERPRETATION OF PLANS AND DOCUMENTS: If any person contemplating
submitting a bid for proposed contract is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part
of the drawings, specifications, or other contract documents, or finds discrepancies
in, or omissions from the drawings and specifications, he may submit to the City a
written request for an interpretation or correction thereof. The person submitting the
request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation or correction of
the contract documents will be made only by Addendum duly issued and a copy of
such addendum will be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set of the
contract document. No person is authorized to make any oral interpretation of any
provision in the contract documents to any bidder, and no bidder is authorized to rely
on any such unauthorized oral interpretation.
10.DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: More than one proposal from an individual, firm
partnership, corporation, or association under the same or different names, will not
be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any bidder is interested in
more than one proposal for the work contemplated will cause the rejection of all
proposals in which such bidder is interested. If there is reason for believing that
collusion exists among the bidders, all bids will be rejected and none of the
participants in such collusion will be considered in future proposals.
No award will be made to any bidder who cannot give satisfactory assurance as to
his ability to carry out the Contract, both from his financial rating and by reason of his
previous experience as a Contractor on work of the nature contemplated in the
Contract. The bidder may be required to submit his record of work of similar nature
to that proposed under these specifications, and unfamiliarity with the type of work
may be sufficient cause for rejection of the bid.
11.INELIGIBLE SUBCONTRACTORS: The successful bidder shall be prohibited from
performing work on this project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work
on the project pursuant to Section 1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code.
12.AWARD OF CONTRACT: No proposal will be considered from a Contractor who is
not licensed as a Class B, C-5, or C-10_contractor at time of award in accordance
with the provisions of the Contractor’s License Law (California Business and
Professions Code, Section 7000 et seq.) and rules and regulations adopted pursuant
thereto or to whom a proposal form has not been issued by the City of Diamond Bar.
The City may award the Contract to the lowest responsible bidder on the total base
bid. Bids will be compared on the basis of the lowest possible cost relative to the
alternate or alternates selected and the Contract, if awarded, will be awarded to a
responsible bidder whose proposal complies with the requirements of these
specifications. The award, if made, will be made within ninety (90) calendar days
after the opening of the proposals; provided that the award may be made after said
period of the successful bidder shall not have given the City written notice of the
withdrawal of his bid.
7
1293492.1
A contractor or subcontractor shall not be qualified to bid on, be listed in a bid
proposal, subject to the requirements of Public Contract Code §4104, or engage in
the performance of any contract for public work, as defined in the Public Contract
Code, unless currently registered and qualified to perform public work pursuant to
Section 1725.5. It is not a violation of Labor Code §1771.1 for an unregistered
contractor to submit a bid that is authorized by Business and Professions Code §
7029.1 or by Public Contract Code §§ 10164 and 20103.5, provided the contractor is
registered to perform public work pursuant to Labor Code § 1725.5 at the time the
contract is awarded.
This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department
of Industrial Relations.
The prime contractor is required to post job sits as prescribed by regulation pursuant
to Labor Code § 1771.4 and all contractors must secure the payment of compensation
to its employees pursuant to Labor Code § 1869.
13.ALTERNATES: If alternate bids are called for, the Contract may be awarded at the
election of the governing board to the lowest responsible bidder on the base bid, or
on the base bid and any specified alternate(s).
14.COMPETENCY OF BIDDERS: In selecting the lowest responsible bidder,
consideration will be given not only to the financial standing but also to the general
competency of the bidder including qualifications, references, proper licensing,
adequate workforce and experience for the performance of the work covered by the
proposal.
15. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: Each bidder shall be skilled and regularly engaged
in the general class or type of work called for under the contract. A statement setting
forth his/her experience shall be submitted by each bidder on the EXPERIENCE
STATEMENT form provided.
8
1293492.1
EXPERIENCE STATEMENT
To be responsive, the bidder must list below a minimum of three public agencies for which bidder
has performed similar work within the past five years. Only projects in excess of $500,000 each
qualify as similar for this project.
1. Project Title
Contract Amount _____
Type of Work
Client
Agency Project Manager ______________________ Phone
Date Completed _____ % Subcontracted
2. Project Title
Contract Amount _____
Type of Work
Client
Agency Project Manager ______________________ Phone
Date Completed ____ % Subcontracted
3. Project Title
Contract Amount _____
Type of Work
Client
Agency Project Manager ______________________ Phone
Date Completed ____ % Subcontracted
NOTE: If requested by the City, the bidder shall furnish a certified financial statement, references,
and other information sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of his current financial
condition.
Bidder's Signature
9
1293492.1
Each bidder shall possess a valid Contractor's License issued by the
Contractor's State License Board at the time his/her bid is submitted. The class
of license shall be applicable to the work specified in the contract. Each bidder
shall also have no less than five (5) years of experience in the magnitude and
character of the work bid.
Bidder Qualifications called for to be submitted at time of bid include, but are
not necessarily limited to:
1. The Contractor shall have been in business under the same name and
California Contractors License for a minimum of five (5) continuous years prior
to the bid opening date for this Project. The license used to satisfy this
requirement shall be of same type required by the contract.
2. License classification shall be as required by the contract specifications.
3. The Contractor shall have five (5) years of experience in the application of
Polymer Modified Asphaltic Emulsion Chip Seal.
4. The Contractor shall perform at least 50% of contract with its own forces.
16.LISTING SUBCONTRACTORS: Each bidder shall submit a list of the proposed
subcontractors on this project as required by the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair
Practices Act (Government Code Section 4100 and following). Forms for this purpose
are furnished with the contract documents. The name and location of business of
any subcontractor who will perform work exceeding 1/2 of 1% of the prime
contractor's total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00), whichever is greater, must
be submitted with the bid. Any other information regarding the foregoing
subcontractors that is required by City to be submitted may be submitted with the bid,
or may be submitted to City up to 24 hours after the deadline established herein for
receipt of bids. The additional information must be submitted by the bidder to the
same address and in the same form applicable to the initial submission of bid.
17.WORKER'S COMPENSATION: In accordance with the provisions of Section 3700
of the Labor Code, the Contractor shall secure the payment of compensation to his
employees. The Contractor shall sign and file with the City the following certificate
prior to performing the work under this contract: "I am aware of the provisions of
Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require compensation or to undertake
self insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply
with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this
contract." The form of such certificate is included as part of the contract documents.
18.BID DEPOSIT RETURN: Deposits of three or more low bidders, the number being
at the discretion of the City, will be held for ninety (90) days or until posting by the
successful bidder of the Bonds required and return of executed copies of the
Agreement, whichever first occurs, at which time the deposits will be returned after
consideration of the bids.
10
1293492.1
19.EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: The bidder to whom award is made shall execute a
written contract with the City on the agreement form provided, and shall secure all
insurance and bonds as herein provided within ten (10) days from the date of written
notice of the award. Failure or refusal to enter into a contract as herein provided, or
to conform to any of the stipulated requirements in connection therewith shall be just
cause for the annulment of the award and the forfeiture of the proposal guarantee.
If the successful bidder refuses or fails to execute the Contract, the City may award
the Contract to the next lowest responsible bidder or re-advertise. On the failure or
refusal of the lowest responsible bidder or next lowest responsible bidder to execute
the Contract, such bidder's guarantees shall be likewise forfeited to the City.
20."OR EQUAL": Pursuant to Division 5, Chapter 4, Article 4 (commencing at #4380)
Government Code, all specifications shall be deemed to include the words "or equal",
provided however that permissible exceptions hereto shall be specifically noted in the
specifications.
21.EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES: The Contractor, and all subcontractors,
shall comply with the provisions in Sections 1777.5, (Chapter 1411, Statutes of 1968),
and 1777.6 of the California Labor Code concerning the employment of apprentices.
The Contractor and any subcontractor under him shall comply with the requirements
of said sections in the employment of apprentices; however, the Contractor shall have
full responsibility for compliance with said Labor Code section, for all apprenticeable
occupations, regardless of any other contractual or employment relationships alleged
to exist. In addition to the above State Labor Code Requirements regarding the
employment of apprentices and trainees, the Contractor and all subcontractors shall
comply with Section 5 a. 3, Title 29 of the Code of Federal Regulations (29CFR).
22.EVIDENCE OF RESPONSIBILITY: Upon the request of the City, a bidder whose bid
is under consideration for the award of the Contract shall submit promptly to the City
satisfactory evidence showing the bidder's financial resources, his construction
experience, and his organization and plant facilities available for the performance of
the contract.
23.WAGE RATES: The Contractor and/or subcontractor shall pay wages as indicated
in the "Notice Inviting Sealed Bids" section of these specifications. The Contractor
shall forfeit as penalty to the City of Diamond Bar, two hundred dollars ($200.00) for
laborers, workmen, or mechanics employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof,
if such laborer, workman or mechanic employed is paid less than the general
prevailing rate of wages herein referred to and stipulated for any work done under the
proposed contract, by him, or by any subcontractor under him, in violation of the
provisions of Labor Code, and in particular, Sections 1770 to 1781 inclusive. Copies
of all collective bargaining agreements relating to the work as set forth in the
aforementioned Labor Code are on file with the Department of Industrial Relations,
Division of Labor Statistics and Research.
24.PERMITS, FEES AND LICENSES: The Contractor shall possess a valid business
license prior to the issuance of the first payment made under this Contract. Any work
required within Caltrans right-of-way will require a separate permit to be obtained by
11
1293492.1
the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain a no-fee Encroachment Permit from the
City of Diamond Bar prior to the start of any work.
25. TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: Bidder must agree to
commence work on or before the date of written "Notice to Proceed" of the City and
to fully complete the project within eighty (80) working days thereafter. Bidder must
agree also to pay as liquidated damages, the sum of two thousand dollars ($500.00)
for each calendar day thereafter.
Bidder must agree to commence work on or before the date of written "Notice to
Proceed" of the City and to fully complete all work within the ballroom between
September 8 and October 10, 2025. Bidder must agree also to pay as liquidated
damages, the sum of two thousand dollars ($1,000.00) for each calendar day
thereafter.
26. CLAIMS FILING AND PROCESSING: The City and Bidder agree to attempt to orally
resolve any disputes which may give rise to a claim (hereafter, "Claim") that falls
within the definition of Public Contract Code section 9204 (hereafter, "Section 9204").
If these efforts are unsuccessful, the City and Bidder shall process the Claim in
accordance with Section 9204. In summary, if the Bidder decides to submit a Claim
to the City, it shall be sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested,
together with reasonable documentation to support the Claim. A Claim may include
a Claim by a subcontractor or a lower tier subcontractor meeting the requirements of
Section 9204(d)(5). Within 45 days of receipt of the Claim, or any extension thereof
agreed upon by the City and the Bidder, the City will conduct a reasonable review of
the Claim and provide the Bidder with a written statement identifying what portion of
the Claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Payment of any undisputed
portion of the Claim shall be made within 60 days after the City issues its written
statement. If the City does not provide a written statement within the time specified,
the Claim shall be deemed rejected.
If the Bidder disputes the City's written statement or if the Claim is deemed rejected,
the Bidder may demand in writing by registered or certified mail to the City, return
receipt requested, an informal conference to meet and confer in an effort to settle the
disputed portion of any Claim. Within 30 days of receipt of such written demand, the
City shall schedule a meet and confer conference.
If any portion of the Claim remains in dispute after the conference, the City shall,
within 10 City business days of the conclusion of the conference, provide the Bidder
with a written statement identifying any portion that remains in dispute and any portion
that is undisputed. Payment of any undisputed portion shall be made within 60 days
after the City issues its written statement. Any remaining disputed portion shall be
submitted to nonbinding mediation in accordance with Section 9204(c)(2)(B), unless
the Bidder and City waive the mediation upon mutual written agreement.
27. CONFLICT OF INTEREST: In the procurement of supplies, equipment, construction
and services by sub-recipients, the conflict of interest provisions in (State LCA-24
CFR 85.36 and Non-Profit Organizations – 24 CFR 84.4), OMB Circular A-110, and
24 CFR 570.611, respectively, shall apply. No employee, officer or agent of the sub-
12
1293492.1
recipient shall participate in selection or in award of administration of a contract
supported by Federal funds if a conflict of interest, real or apparent, would be
involved.
13
1293492.1
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
CITY PROJECT NO. FP23500 & FP23501
Date , 20
To the City Council of the City of Diamond Bar:
The Undersigned hereby declares:
(a) That the only persons or parties interested in this proposal as principals are the following:
(If the bidder is a corporation, give the name of the corporation and the name of its
president, secretary, treasurer, and manager. If a co-partnership, give the name, under
which the co-partnership does business, and the names and addresses of all co-partners.
If an individual, state the name under which the contract is to be drawn.)
(b) That this proposal is made without collusion with any person, firm or corporation.
(c) That he has carefully examined the location of the proposed work and has familiarized
himself with all of the physical and climatic conditions, and makes this bid solely upon his
own knowledge.
(d) That by submitting this Bidder's Proposal, he acknowledges receipt and knowledge of the
contents of those communications sent by the City of Diamond Bar to him at the address
furnished by him to the City of Diamond Bar when this proposal form was obtained.
(e) That he has carefully examined the specifications, both general and detail, and the
drawings attached hereto, and communications sent to him as aforesaid, and makes this
proposal in accordance therewith.
(f) That, if this bid is accepted he will enter into a written contract for the performance of the
proposed work with the City of Diamond Bar.
(g) That he proposes to enter into such Contract and to accept in full payment for the work
actually done thereunder the prices shown in the attached schedule. It is understood and
agreed that the quantities set forth are estimates and that the unit prices will apply to the
actual quantities whatever they may be.
14
1293492.1
Accompanying this proposal is a certified or cashier's check or bidder's bond, payable to
the order of the City of Diamond Bar in the sum of
DOLLARS ($ ).
Said bidder's bond has been duly executed by the undersigned bidder and by a financially sound
surety company authorized to transact business in this state.
It is understood and agreed that should the bidder fail within ten (10) days after award of
contract to enter into the contract and furnish acceptable surety bonds, then the proceeds of
said check, or bidder's bond, shall become the property of the City of Diamond Bar; but if this
Contract is entered into and said bonds are furnished, or if the bid is not accepted then said
check shall be returned to the undersigned, or the bidder will be released from the bidder's bond.
Address of Bidder Telephone of Bidder
City Zip Code Signature of Bidder
15
1293492.1
BID SCHEDULE
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
CITY PROJECT NO. FP23500 & FP23501
Item
No.Description
Estimated
Quantity Unit Unit Price Amount
Mobilization/Overhead & Profit 1 LS
Access Control 1 LS
New Entry Addition
Demolition
Removal of existing door, finishes and concrete 1 LS
Site Concrete
New Exterior Concrete Walk 200 SF
Concrete Buidling Foundation
Concrete Footings 25 LF
Concrete Slab and Base 68 SF
Wood Structural Framing
Framing, Structural Sheathing & Connections 1 LS
Existing Trellis Modification
Cut and Reframe Existing Trellis & Paint 1 LS
Door, Frame, Insulated Glass, Transom & Hardware
Automatic Sliding Door System & Glazing 1 LS
Exterior Finishes
Exterior Stucco 200 SF
Exterior Paint 200 SF
TPO Roofing 60 SF
Flashings 1 LS
Interior Finishes
Wood Paneling 210 SF
5/8" Drywall 155 SF
Prime & Paint 155 SF
Tile Flooring & Base 67 SF
Fire Suppression/Alarm
Fire Suppression/Alarm, Patch & Paint (E)
Finishes 1 LS
16
1293492.1
Plumbing
Roof Drain, Scupper & Downspout 1 LS
Electrical
Lighting & Door Power Connection 1 LS
New Doors, Glazing & Hardware
Demolition
Removal of (E) doors, hardware & HM Frames 1 LS
Hollow Metal Doors, Frames & Glazing
HM Doors, Frames, Glazing & Installation 1 LS
Fire Rated Glazing 166 SF
Fire Rated HM Frames 262 LF
Door Harware
New Door Hardware & Installation 1 LS
Banquet Room Lighting & Controls
Demolition
Removal of existing lighting & Controls 1 LS
Lighting Controls
New Lighting Control Panels and Installation &1 LS
Additional Relays per Specs
Light Fixtures & Installation
New 4 ft Cove Lighting w/ Additional per Specs 72 EA
New Wall Sconces 7 EA
New Down Lights w/ Additional per Specs 14 EA
Light Coves
New Light Cove Framing & Finish 1,380 SF
Paint Existing Soffit 750 SF
17
1293492.1
MANDATORY BID SCHEDULE ITEMS:
TOTAL AMOUNT BID (IN FIGURES)
TOTAL AMOUNT BID, SCHEDULE (WRITTEN IN WORDS):
Bid Schedule Note: Bid Price indicated refers to all items illustrated on the plans and details,
and delineated within the specifications installed and completely in place with all applicable
portions of the construction documents and include all costs connected with such items
including, but to necessarily limited to, materials, transportation, taxes, insurance, labor,
overhead, and profit, for General Contractor and Subcontractors.
All work called for on the construction documents are to provide a completed project with all
systems operating properly and ready for use.
Award will be based on the items of Bid Schedule. Therefore, Contractor shall completely fill out
Bid Schedule.
Accompanying this proposal is
(Insert "$ cash", "cashier's check", "certified check", or
"bidder's bond" as the case may be) in the amount equal to at least ten percent
(10%) of the total bid.
The undersigned further agrees that in case of default in executing the required
contract, with necessary bond, within ten (10) days, not including Sundays and
legal holidays, after having received notice that the Contract has been awarded
and ready for signature, the proceeds of the security accompanying his bid shall
become the property of the City of Diamond Bar, and this proposal and the
acceptance thereof may be considered null and void.
NAME OF BIDDER (PRINT) SIGNATURE DATE
ADDRESS
CITY ZIP CODE TELEPHONE
STATE CONTRACTOR LICENSE NO. AND CLASSIFICATION
18
1293492.1
I declare under penalty of Perjury of the laws of the State of California that the representations
made herein are true and correct in accordance with the requirements of California Business
and Professional Code Section 7028.15.
CONTRACTOR SIGNATURE OR AUTHORIZED OFFICER
19
1293492.1
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS *
BID OPENING DATE
PROJECT PROJECT NO.
LOCATION
CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
Name Under Which
Subcontractor is
Licensed
License
No.
&
DIR No.
Address
of
Place of Business
Percent
of
Total
Contract
Specific Description
of
Subcontract
* In compliance with the provisions of the Public Contract Code Section 4104, the
undersigned bidder herewith sets forth the name, location of the place of business, and
California contractor license of each Subcontractor – who will perform work or labor or
20
1293492.1
render service to the Prime Contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the
work or improvement necessary to complete construction contained in the plans and
specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half (1/2) of one percent (1%) of the General
Contractor’s total base bid amount or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of
streets or highways, including bridges in excess of one-half of 1 percent (0.5%)of the
Prime Contractor’s total base bid or ten thousand ($10,000.00), whichever is greater, and
the portion of the work which will be done by each Subcontractor.
21
1293492.1
DECLARATION OF ELIGIBILITY TO CONTRACT
Labor Code Section 1777.1; Public Contract Code Section 6109
The undersigned, a duly authorized representative of the contractor, certifies and declares that:
1. The contractor is aware of Sections 1777.1 and 1777.7 of the California Labor Code,
which prohibit a contractor or subcontractor who has been found by the Labor
Commissioner or the Director of Industrial Relations to be in violation of certain provisions
of the Labor Code, from bidding on, being awarded, or performing work as a subcontractor
on a public works project for specified periods of time.
2. The contractor is not ineligible to bid on, be awarded or perform work as a subcontractor
on a public works project by virtue of the foregoing provisions of Sections 1777.1 or
1777.7 of the California Labor Code or another provision of law.
3. The contractor is aware of California Public Contract Code Section 6109, which states:
(a) A public entity, as defined in Section 1100 [of the Public Contract Code], may
not permit a contractor or subcontractor who is ineligible to bid or work on, or be
awarded, a public works project pursuant to Section 1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor
Code to bid on, be awarded, or perform work as a subcontractor on, a public works
project. Every public works project shall contain a provision prohibiting a
contractor from performing work on a public works project with a subcontractor
who is ineligible to perform work on the public works project pursuant to Section
1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code.
(b) Any contract on a public works project entered into between a contractor and
a debarred subcontractor is void as a matter of law. A debarred subcontractor may
not receive any public money for performing work as a subcontractor on a public
works contract, and any public money that may have been paid to a debarred
subcontractor by a contractor on the project shall be returned to the awarding body.
The contractor shall be responsible for the payment of wages to workers of a
debarred subcontractor who has been allowed to work on the project.
4. The contractor has investigated the eligibility of each and every subcontractor the
contractor intends to use on this public works project, and determined that none of them
is ineligible to perform work as a subcontractor on a public works project by virtue of the
foregoing provisions of the Public Contract Code Sections 1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor
Code, or any other provision of law.
22
1293492.1
I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is
true and correct. Executed this day of ________________, 202_, at ___________________
(place of execution).
Signature
Name:
Title:
Name of Contractor:
_____________________________
23
1293492.1
BIDDER'S VIOLATION OF LAW/SAFETY QUESTIONNAIRE
In accordance with Government Code Section 14310.5 and in conformance with Public Contract
Code Section 10162, the Bidder shall complete, under penalty of perjury, the following
questionnaire:
QUESTIONNAIRE
Has the Bidder, any officer, principal or employee of the Bidder who has a proprietary interest in
the business of the Bidder, ever been disqualified, removed, or otherwise prevented from bidding
on or completing a federal, state or local government project because of violation of law or a
safety regulation?
YES NO
If the answer is yes, explain the circumstances in the following space:
STATEMENT
In conformance with Public Contract Code Section 10232, the Contractor, hereby states under
penalty of perjury, that no more than on final unappealable finding of contempt of court by a
federal court has been issued against the Contractor within the immediately preceding two-year
period because of the Contractor’s failure to comply with an order of a federal court which orders
the Contractor to comply with an order of the National Labor Relations Board.
NOTE: The above Statement and Questionnaire are part of the Proposal. Signing
this Proposal on the signature portion thereof shall also constitute signature
of this Statement and Questionnaire.
Bidders are cautioned that making a false certification may subject the
certifier to criminal prosecution.
24
1293492.1
CONTRACTOR'S INDUSTRIAL SAFETY RECORD
Project Identification
Bid Date
This information must include all construction work undertaken in the State of California by the
bidder and any partnership, joint venture or corporation that any principal of the bidder
participated in as a principal or owner for the last five calendar years and the current calendar
year prior to the date of bid submittal. Separate information shall be submitted for each particular
partnership, joint venture, corporation or individual bidder. The bidder may attach any additional
information or explanation of data, which he would like, taken into consideration in evaluating
the safety record. An explanation must be attached of the circumstances surrounding any and
all fatalities.
ITEM 5 CALENDAR YEARS
PRIOR TO CURRENT YEAR
CURRENT
YEAR
2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 TOTAL
No. of Contracts
Total dollar amount
of
contracts (in 1,000’s)
No. of lost workday
cases
No. of lost work day
cases
involving permanent
transfer to
another job or
termination of
employment
No. of lost workdays
*The information required for this item is the same as required for columns 3 to 6, Code 10,
Occupational Injuries, Summary - Occupational Injuries and Illnesses, OSHA No. 102.
The above information was compiled from the records that are available to me at this time and I
declare under penalty of perjury that the information is true and accurate within the limitations of
these records.
______________________________ ________________________________
Name of Bidder (Print Signature
______________________________ ________________________________
Address State Contractor’s Lic. No. & Class
______________________________ ________________________________
City Zip Code Telephone
25
1293492.1
AFFIDAVIT FOR CO-PARTNERSHIP FIRM
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
)SS
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES )
, being first duly sworn, deposes and says:
That he is a member of the co-partnership firm designated as
which is the party making the foregoing proposal or bid; that such bid is genuine and not collusive
or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly,
with any other bidder or person to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from
bidding; and has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure any advantage against the
City of Diamond Bar or any person interested in the proposed contract, for himself or for any
other person.
That he has been and is duly vested with authority to make and sign instruments for the co-
partnership by
who constitute the other members of the co-partnership.
Signature
Subscribed and sworn
to before me this
day of , 20
Signature of Officer Administering Oath
(Notary Public)
26
1293492.1
AFFIDAVIT FOR CORPORATION BIDDER
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
)SS
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES )
, being first duly sworn, deposes and says:
That he is
of,
a corporation which is the party making the foregoing proposal or bid; that such bid is genuine
and not collusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed,
directly or indirectly, with any other bidder or person to put in a sham bid or that such other
person shall refrain from bidding; and has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure any
advantage against the City of Diamond Bar or any person interested in the proposed contract,
for himself or for any other person.
Signature
Subscribed and sworn
to before me this
day of , 20
Signature of Officer Administering Oath
(Notary Public)
27
1293492.1
AFFIDAVIT FOR INDIVIDUAL BIDDER
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
)SS
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES )
, being first duly sworn, deposes and says:
That he is the party making the foregoing proposal or bid; that such bid is genuine and not
collusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or
indirectly, with any other bidder or person to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall
refrain from bidding; and has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure any advantage
against the City of Diamond Bar or any person interested in the proposed contract, for himself
or for any other person.
Signature
Subscribed and sworn
to before me this
day of , 20
Signature of Officer Administering Oath
(Notary Public)
28
1293492.1
AFFIDAVIT FOR JOINT VENTURE
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
)SS
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES )
, being first duly sworn, deposes and says:
That he
of,
one of the parties submitting the foregoing bid as a joint venture and that he has been and is
duly vested with the authority to make and sign instruments for and on behalf of the parties
making said bid who are:
;
that such bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired,
connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other bidder or person to put in a sham bid or
that such other person shall refrain from bidding; and has not in any manner sought by collusion
to secure any advantage against the City of Diamond Bar or any person interested in the
proposed contract, for himself or for any other person.
Signature
Subscribed and sworn
to before me this
day of , 20
Signature of Officer Administering Oath
(Notary Public)
BOND No.________________
29
1293492.1
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that, WHEREAS the City of Diamond
Bar ("City"), has awarded to
(Name and address of Contractor)
("Principal"), a contract (the "Contract") for the work described as follows:
WHEREAS, Principal is required under the terms of the Contract to furnish a bond for the faithful
performance of the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, we the undersigned Principal, and_________________________
(Name and address of Surety)
("Surety") a duly admitted surety insurer under the laws of the State of California, as Surety, are
held and firmly bound unto City in the
penal sum of
Dollars ($______________), this amount being not less than the total contract price, in lawful
money of the United States of America, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made,
we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and
severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if the hereby bounded Principal, his,
her, or its, heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to
and abide by, and covenants, conditions and agreements in the Contract and any alteration
thereof made as therein provided, on the Principal's part to be kept and performed, all within the
time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and
meaning, and shall indemnify and hold harmless City, its officers, agents, and others as therein
provided, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in
full force and effect.
In case suit is brought upon this bond, Surety further agrees to pay all court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees in an amount fixed by the court.
FURTHER, the Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alteration, addition or modification to the terms of the Contract, or of the work
30
1293492.1
to be performed thereunder, or the specifications for the same, shall in any way affect its
obligations under this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of
time, alteration, addition, or modification to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the
specifications thereunder. Surety hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code §§ 2845
and 2849. The City is the principal beneficiary of this bond and has rights of a party hereto.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, two (2) identical counterparts of this instrument, each of which shall
for all purposes be deemed an original hereof, have been duly executed by Principal and Surety,
on the date set forth below, the name of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these
presents duly signed by its undersigned representative(s) pursuant to authority of its governing
body.
Dated:__________________
"Principal" "Surety"
______________________________ _______________________________
______________________________ _______________________________
By:___________________________ By:____________________________
Its Its
By:___________________________ By:____________________________
Its Its
Note: This bond must be dated, all signatures must be notarized, and evidence of the authority
of any person signing as attorney-in-fact must be attached.
(Seal) (Seal)
APPROVED AS TO SURETY AND
PRINCIPAL AMOUNT
By:___________________________
Insurance Administrator
BOND No.________________
31
1293492.1
PAYMENT BOND
(LABOR AND MATERIAL)
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that, WHEREAS the City of Diamond Bar (City),
has awarded to ________________________________________________________
(Name and address of Contractor)
("Principal"), a contract (the "Contract") for the work described as follows:
WHEREAS, Principal is required under the terms of the Contract and the California Civil Code
to secure the payment of claims of laborers, mechanics, materialmen, and other persons as
provided by law.
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Principal, and______________________________
(Name and address of Surety)
("Surety") a duly admitted surety insurer under the laws of the State of California, as Surety, are
held and firmly bound unto City in the penal sum of
Dollars($________________), this amount being not less than one
hundred (100%) of the total contract price, in lawful money of the United States of America, for
the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if the hereby bounded Principal,
his, her or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, or subcontractors shall
fail to pay any of the persons named in Section 3181 of the California Civil Code, or any amounts
due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed under
the Contract, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the
Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the Principal and
subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code, with respect
to work or labor performed under the Contract, the Surety will pay for the same in an amount not
exceeding the penal sum specified in this bond; otherwise, this obligation shall become null and
void. This bond shall insure to the benefit of any of their persons named in Section 3181 of the
California Civil Code so as to give a right of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit
brought upon the bond. In case suit is brought upon this bond, Surety further agrees to pay all
court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees in an amount fixed by the court.
FURTHER, the Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alteration, addition, or modification to the terms of the Contract or of the work
to be performed thereunder, or the specifications for the same, shall in any way affect its
obligations under this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of
time, alteration, addition, or modification to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the
32
1293492.1
specifications thereunder. Surety hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code §§ 2845
and 2849.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, two (2) identical counterparts of this instrument, each of which shall
for all purposes be deemed an original hereof, have been duly executed by Principal and Surety,
on the date set forth below, the name of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these
presents duly signed by its undersigned representative(s) pursuant to authority of its governing
body.
Dated
"Principal" "Surety"
______________________________ _______________________________
______________________________ _______________________________
By:___________________________ By:____________________________
Its Its
By:___________________________ By:____________________________
Its Its
Notary
Note: This bond must be dated, all signatures must be notarized, and evidence of the authority
of any person signing as attorney-in-fact must be attached.
(Seal) (Seal)
APPROVED AS TO SURETY AND
PRINCIPAL AMOUNT
By:___________________________
Insurance Administrator
BOND No._________________
33
1293492.1
BID BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that,
WHEREAS the City of Diamond Bar (“City”), has issued an invitation for bids for the work
described as follows:
____________________________________________________ Project No. _____
WHEREAS
(Name and address of Bidder)
("Principal"), desires to submit a bid to Public Agency for the work.
WHEREAS, bidders are required under the provisions of the California Public Contract Code to
furnish a form of bidder's security with their bid.
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Principal, and
(Name and address of Surety)
("Surety") a duly admitted surety insurer under the laws of the State of California, as Surety, are
held and firmly bound unto Public Agency in the penal sum of
Dollars($______________), being not less than ten percent (10%) of the total bid price, in lawful
money of the United States of America, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made,
we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and
severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if the hereby bounded Principal is
awarded a contract for the work by City and within the time and in the manner required by the
bidding specifications, entered into the written form of contract included with bidding
specifications, furnishes the required bonds, one to guarantee faithful performance and the other
to guarantee payment for labor and materials, and furnishes the required insurance coverages,
then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and
effect.
In case suit is brought upon this bond, Surety further agrees to pay all court costs incurred by
City in the suit and reasonable attorneys' fees in an amount fixed by the court. Surety hereby
waives the provisions of California Civil Code § 2845.
34
1293492.1
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original hereof,
have been duly executed by Principal and Surety, on the date set forth below, the name of each
corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned
representative(s) pursuant to authority of its governing body.
Dated:
"Principal" "Surety"
______________________________ _______________________________
______________________________ _______________________________
By:___________________________ By:____________________________
Its Its
By:___________________________ By:____________________________
Its Its
Note: This bond must be dated, all signatures must be notarized, and evidence of the authority
of any person signing as attorney-in-fact must be attached.
(Seal) (Seal)
1293492.1
CERTIFICATION OF NON-DISCRIMINATION AND AFFIRMATIVE ACTION
As suppliers of goods or services to the City of Diamond Bar, the firm listed below certifies that
it does not discriminate in its employment with regards to race, religion, sex, or national origin;
that it is in compliance with all federal, state, and local directives and executive orders regarding
non-discrimination in employment; and that it will pursue an affirmative course of action as
required by the affirmative action guidelines.
We agree specifically:
1. To establish or observe employment policies which affirmatively promote opportunities
for minority persons at all job levels.
2. To communicate this policy to all persons concerned including all company employees,
outside recruiting services, especially those serving minority communities, and to the
minority communities at large.
3. To take affirmative steps to hire minority employees within the company.
FIRM
TITLE OF OFFICER SIGNING
SIGNATURE DATE
Please include any additional information available regarding equal opportunity employment
programs now in effect within your company:
1
1293492.1
CERTIFICATION WITH REGARD TO THE PERFORMANCE OF
PREVIOUS CONTRACTS OR SUBCONTRACTS SUBJECT TO THE
EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE AND THE FILING OF REQUIRED REPORTS
The bidder , proposed subcontractor , hereby certifies that he has , has not ,
participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the Equal Opportunity Clause, as
required by Executive Orders 10925, 11114, or 11246, and that he has , has not , filed
with the Joint Reporting Committee, the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance,
a Federal Government contracting or administering agency, or the former President's Committee
on Equal Employment Opportunity, all reports due under the applicable filing requirements.
(COMPANY)
BY:
(TITLE)
DATE: , 20 .
NOTE: The above certification is required by the Equal Employment Opportunity Regulations
of the Secretary of Labor (41 CFR 60-1.7 (b) (1), and must be submitted by bidders and proposed
subcontractors only in connection with contracts and subcontracts which are subject to the Equal
Opportunity Clause. Contracts and subcontracts which are exempt from the Equal Opportunity
Clause are set forth in 41 CFR 60-1.5. (Generally only contracts or subcontracts of $10,000 or
under are exempt).
Currently, Standard Form 100 (EEO-1) is the only report required by the Executive Orders or
their implementing regulations.
Proposed prime contractors and subcontractors who have participated in a previous contract or
subcontract subject to the Executive Orders and have not filed the required reports should note
that 41 CFR 60-1.7 (b) (1) prevents the award of contracts and subcontracts unless such
contractor submits a report covering the delinquent period of such other period specified by the
Federal Highway Administration or by the Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance, U.S.
Department of Labor.
2
1293492.1
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
TO: THE CITY OF DIAMOND BAR:
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
)SS
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES )
, being first duly
sworn, deposes and says that he or she is of
, the party making the foregoing bid, that the bid is not made in the
interest of or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company association,
organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder
has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited another bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and
has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone
else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any
manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone
to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element
of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public
body awarding the contact or anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements
contained in the bid are true; and further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted
his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or
data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company
association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a
collusive or sham bid.
Signature of Bidder
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
)SS
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES )
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of ,20 .
Notary Public in and for the County of
, State of California
3
1293492.1
Bidder Agrees to Execute Agreement
In Substantially This Form
AGREEMENT
The following agreement ("AGREEMENT") is made and entered into, in duplicate, as of
the date executed by the Mayor and attested to by the City Clerk, by and between
____________________ hereinafter referred to as the "CONTRACTOR" and the City of
Diamond Bar, California, hereinafter referred to as "CITY."
WHEREAS, pursuant to Notice Inviting Sealed Bids, bids were received, publicly opened,
and declared on the date specified in the notice; and
WHEREAS, CITY accepted the bid of CONTRACTOR __________________________
and;
WHEREAS, CITY has authorized the Mayor to execute a written contract with
CONTRACTOR for furnishing labor, equipment and material for the
___________________________ Project in the City of Diamond Bar.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, it is
agreed:
1. GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK: CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary labor,
tools, materials, appliances, and equipment for and do the work for the
_________________________Project in the City of Diamond Bar. The work to be performed
in accordance with the plans and specifications, dated (The Plans and Specifications)
on file in the office of the City Clerk and in accordance with bid prices hereinafter mentioned and
in accordance with the instructions of the City Engineer.
2. INCORPORATED DOCUMENTS TO BE CONSIDERED COMPLEMENTARY:
The Plans and Specifications are incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof with
like force and effect as if set forth in full herein. The Plans and Specifications, CONTRACTOR'S
Bid dated , together with this AGREEMENT, shall constitute the contract
between the parties. This AGREEMENT is intended to require a complete and finished piece of
work and anything necessary to complete the work properly and in accordance with the law and
lawful governmental regulations shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR whether set out
specifically in the contract or not. Should it be ascertained that any inconsistency exists between
the aforesaid documents and this AGREEMENT, the following order of precedence shall apply:
(1) This AGREEMENT; (2) The Plans and Specifications; and (3) Contractor's bid.
3. COMPENSATION: CONTRACTOR agrees to receive and accept the prices set
forth in its Bid Proposal as full compensation for furnishing all materials, performing all work, and
fulfilling all obligations hereunder. Said compensation in the amount of [Insert total
compensation amount] shall cover all expenses, losses, damages, and consequences arising
out of the nature of the work during its progress or prior to its acceptance including those for well
and faithfully completing the work and the whole thereof in the manner and time specified in the
aforesaid contract documents; and also including those arising from actions of the elements,
unforeseen difficulties or obstructions encountered in the prosecution of the work, suspension
or discontinuance of the work, and all other unknowns or risks of any description connected with
4
1293492.1
the work. Final payment to Contractor shall be withheld for at least 30 days after the time in
which Contractor has verified, to the City's satisfaction, that it has submitted all information to
the Department of Industrial Relations required by Labor Code §1773.3.
4. TERM OF CONTRACT: CONTRACTOR agrees to complete the work within
_eighty (80) working days from the date of the notice to proceed.
CONTRACTOR agrees further to the assessment of liquidated damages in the
amount of ____________ dollars ($_____) for each calendar day the work remains incomplete
beyond the expiration of the completion date. CITY may deduct the amount thereof from any
monies due or that may become due the CONTRACTOR under this AGREEMENT. Progress
payments made after the scheduled date of completion shall not constitute a waiver of liquidated
damages.
5. INSURANCE: CONTRACTOR shall not commence work under this contract until
he has obtained all insurance required hereunder in a company or companies acceptable to
CITY nor shall the CONTRACTOR allow any subcontractor to commence work on his
subcontract until all insurance required of the subcontractor has been obtained. The
CONTRACTOR shall take out and maintain at all times during the life of this contract the
following policies of insurance:
a. Workers' Compensation Insurance: Before beginning work, the
CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the CITY a certificate of insurance as proof
that he has taken out full workers' compensation insurance for all persons
whom he may employ directly or through subcontractors in carrying out the
work specified herein, in accordance with the laws of the State of California.
Such insurance shall be maintained in full force and effect during the period
covered by this contract.
In accordance with the provisions of Section 3700 of the California Labor
Code, every CONTRACTOR shall secure the payment of compensation to
his employees. The CONTRACTOR, prior to commencing work, shall sign
and file with the CITY a certification as follows:
"I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which
requires every employer to be insured against liability for workers'
compensation or to undertake self insurance in accordance with the
provisions of that Code, and I will comply with such provisions before
commencing the performance of work of this contract."
b. For all operations of the CONTRACTOR or any sub-contractor in performing
the work provided for herein, insurance with the following minimum limits
and coverage:
1) General Liability - $5,000,000 per occurrence for bodily injury,
personal injury and property damage. If Commercial General
Liability insurance or other form with a general aggregate limit is
used, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this
AGREEMENT or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the
required occurrence limit.
2) Automobile - $5,000,000 per accident for bodily injury and property
damage.
5
1293492.1
3) Employer's Liability - $5,000,000 per accident for bodily injury or
disease.
c. Each such policy of insurance provided for in paragraph b. shall:
1) Be issued by an insurance company approved in writing by CITY,
which is authorized to do business in the State of California.
2) Name as additional insured the City of Diamond Bar, its officers,
agents and employees, and any other parties specified in the bid
documents to be so included;
3) Specify it acts as primary insurance and that no insurance held or
owned by the designated additional insured shall be called upon to
cover a loss under the policy;
4) Contain a clause substantially in the following words:
"It is hereby understood and agreed that this policy may not be
canceled nor the amount of the coverage thereof reduced until thirty
(30) days after receipt by CITY of a written notice of such cancellation
or reduction of coverage."
5) Otherwise be in form satisfactory to the CITY.
d. The policy of insurance provided for in subparagraph a. shall contain an
endorsement which:
1) Waives all right of subrogation against all persons and entities
specified in subparagraph 4.c.(2) hereof to be listed as additional
insured in the policy of insurance provided for in paragraph b. by
reason of any claim arising out of or connected with the operations
of CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor in performing the work
provided for herein;
2) Provides it shall not be canceled or altered without thirty (30) days'
written notice thereof given to CITY.
e. The CONTRACTOR shall, prior to performing any work under this
AGREEMENT, deliver to the City Manager or his designee the original
policies of insurance required in paragraphs a. and b. hereof, or deliver to
the City Manager or his designee a certificate of the insurance company,
showing the issuance of such insurance, and the additional insured and
other provisions required herein.
f. Self Insured Retention/Deductibles. All policies required by this
AGREEMENT shall allow CITY, as additional insured, to satisfy the self-
insured retention (“SIR”) and/or deductible of the policy in lieu of the Owner
(as the named insured) should CONTRACTOR fail to pay the SIR or
deductible requirements. The amount of the SIR or deductible shall be
subject to the approval of the City Attorney and the Finance Director.
CONTRACTOR understands and agrees that satisfaction of this
requirement is an express condition precedent to the effectiveness of this
AGREEMENT. Failure by CONTRACTOR as primary insured to pay its SIR
6
1293492.1
or deductible constitutes a material breach of this AGREEMENT. Should
CITY pay the SIR or deductible on CONTRACTOR’s behalf upon the
CONTRACTOR’s failure or refusal to do so in order to secure defense and
indemnification as an additional insured under the policy, CITY may include
such amounts as damages in any action against CONTRACTOR for breach
of this AGREEMENT in addition to any other damages incurred by CITY
due to the breach.
6. PREVAILING WAGE: Notice is hereby given that in accordance with the
provisions of California Labor Code, Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1, Articles 1 and 2, the
CONTRACTOR is required to pay not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages
for work of a similar character in the locality in which the public works is performed, and not less
than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for holiday and overtime work. In that regard,
the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations of the State of California is required to and
has determined such general prevailing rates of per diem wages. Copies of such prevailing
rates of per diem wages are on file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Diamond Bar,
21825 Copley Drive, Diamond Bar, California, and are available to any interested party on
request. CITY also shall cause a copy of such determinations to be posted at the job site.
CONTRACTOR shall forfeit, as penalty to CITY, not more than two hundred dollars
($200.00) for each laborer, workman or mechanic employed for each calendar day or portion
thereof, if such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the general prevailing rate of
wages hereinbefore stipulated for any work done under this AGREEMENT, by him or by any
subcontractor under him.
CONTRACTOR and any of its subcontractors must be registered with the Department of
Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5, which precludes the award of a
contract for a public work on any public works project awarded after April 1, 2015. This
Agreement is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial
Relations.
7. APPRENTICESHIP EMPLOYMENT: In accordance with the provisions of Section
1777.5 of the Labor Code, and in accordance with the regulations of the California
Apprenticeship Council, properly indentured apprentices may be employed in the performance
of the work.
CONTRACTOR is required to make contribution to funds established for the
administrative of apprenticeship programs if he employs registered apprentices or journeymen
in any apprenticeship trade on such contracts and if other CONTRACTOR'S on the public works
site are making such contributions.
CONTRACTOR and subcontractor under him shall comply with the requirements of
Sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 in the employment of apprentices.
Information relative to apprenticeship standards, wage schedules and other requirements
may be obtained from the Director of Industrial Relations, ex-officio the Administrator of
Apprenticeship, San Francisco, California, or from the Division of Apprenticeship Standards and
its branch offices.
8. LEGAL HOURS OF WORK: Eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute a legal day's
work for all workmen employed in the execution of this contract, and the CONTRACTOR and
any sub-contractor under him shall comply with and be governed by the laws of the State of
California having to do with working hours set forth in Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 3 of
the Labor Code of the State of California as amended.
7
1293492.1
CONTRACTOR shall forfeit, as a penalty to City, twenty-five dollars ($25.00) for
each laborer, workman or mechanic employed in the execution of the contract, by him or any
sub- CONTRACTOR under him, upon any of the work hereinbefore mentioned, for each
calendar day during which the laborer, workman or mechanic is required or permitted to labor
more than eight (8) hours in violation of the Labor Code.
9. TRAVEL AND SUBSISTENCE PAY: CONTRACTOR agrees to pay travel and
subsistence pay to each workman needed to execute the work required by this contract as such
travel and subsistence payments are defined in the applicable collective bargaining agreements
filed in accordance with Labor Code Section 1773.8.
10. CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY: The CITY and its officers, agents and employees
("Indemnitees") shall not be answerable or accountable in any manner for any loss or damage
that may happen to the work or any part thereof, or for any of the materials or other things used
or employed in performing the work; or for injury or damage to any person or persons, either
workers or employees of CONTRACTOR, of its subcontractors or the public, or for damage to
adjoining or other property from any cause whatsoever arising out of or in connection with the
performance of the work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage or injury to any
person or property resulting from defects or obstructions or from any cause whatsoever.
CONTRACTOR will indemnify Indemnities against and will hold and save Indemnitees
harmless from any and all actions, claims, damages to persons or property, penalties,
obligations or liabilities that may be asserted or claimed by any person, firm, entity, corporation,
political subdivision, or other organization arising out of or in connection with the work, operation,
or activities of CONTRACTOR, its agents, employees, subcontractors or invitees provided for
herein, whether or not there is concurrent passive negligence on the part of CITY. In connection
therewith:
a. CONTRACTOR will defend any action or actions filed in connection with
any such claims, damages, penalties, obligations or liabilities and will pay
all costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees, expert fees and costs
incurred in connection therewith.
b. CONTRACTOR will promptly pay any judgment rendered against
CONTRACTOR or Indemnitees covering such claims, damages, penalties,
obligations and liabilities arising out of or in connection with such work,
operations or activities of CONTRACTOR hereunder, and CONTRACTOR
agrees to save and hold the Indemnitees harmless therefrom.
c. In the event Indemnitees are made a party to any action or proceeding filed
or prosecuted against CONTRACTOR for damages or other claims arising
out of or in connection with the work, operation or activities hereunder,
CONTRACTOR agrees to pay to Indemnitees and any all costs and
expenses incurred by Indemnitees in such action or proceeding together
with reasonable attorneys' fees.
Contractor's obligations under this section apply regardless of whether or not such claim,
charge, damage, demand, action, proceeding, loss, stop notice, cost, expense, judgment, civil
fine or penalty, or liability was caused in part or contributed to by an Indemnitee. However,
without affecting the rights of CITY under any provision of this AGREEMENT, Contractor shall
not be required to indemnify and hold harmless CITY for liability attributable to the active
negligence of CITY, provided such active negligence is determined by agreement between the
parties or by the findings of a court of competent jurisdiction. In instances where CITY is shown
to have been actively negligent and where CITY active negligence accounts for only a
8
1293492.1
percentage of the liability involved, the obligation of Contractor will be for that entire portion or
percentage of liability not attributable to the active negligence of CITY.
So much of the money due to CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of the contract as shall
be considered necessary by CITY may be retained by CITY until disposition has been made of
such actions or claims for damages as aforesaid.
It is expressly understood and agreed that the foregoing provisions are intended to be as
broad and inclusive as is permitted by the law of the State of California. This indemnity provision
shall survive the termination of the AGREEMENT and is in addition to any other rights or
remedies which Indemnitees may have under the law.
This indemnity is effective without reference to the existence or applicability of any
insurance coverage which may have been required under this AGREEMENT or any additional
insured endorsements which may extend to Indemnitees.
CONTRACTOR, on behalf of itself and all parties claiming under or through it, hereby
waives all rights of subrogation and contribution against the Indemnitees, while acting within the
scope of their duties, from all claims, losses and liabilities arising out of or incident to activities
or operations performed by or on behalf of the CONTRACTOR regardless of any prior,
concurrent, or subsequent passive negligence by the Indemnitees.
11. NON-DISCRIMINATION: Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1735, no discrimination
shall be made in the employment of persons in the work contemplated by this AGREEMENT
because of the race, color or religion of such person. A violation of this section exposes the
CONTRACTOR to the penalties provided for in Labor Code Section 1735.
12. PAYMENT FUND: A City Council resolution established a Project Payment
Account, encumbered money in the current budget, and assigned that money to the Project
Payment Account, which is the sole source of funds available for payment of the contract sum
set forth in Section 3 of this AGREEMENT. CONTRACTOR understands and agrees that
CONTRACTOR will be paid only from this special fund and if for any reason this fund is not
sufficient to pay CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR will not be entitled to payment. The availability
of money in this fund, and CITY's ability to draw from this fund, are conditions precedent to
CITY's obligation to make payments to CONTRACTOR.
13. PRESENTATION OF CLAIMS: Any claim, as that term is defined in Public
Contract Code §9204, shall be submitted in accordance with Section 9204 and shall contain a
sufficient description of the claim, the basis therefore and documentation in support of the claim.
The claim shall be processed as more fully set forth in the Plans and Specifications.
14. TERMINATION: This AGREEMENT may be terminated by the CITY, without
cause, upon the giving of a written "Notice of Termination" to CONTRACTOR at least thirty (30)
days prior to the date of termination specified in the notice. Upon receipt of such notice,
Contractor shall immediately cease work, unless otherwise directed by the Notice of
Termination. In the event of such termination, Contractor shall be paid for services satisfactorily
rendered and expenses reasonably and necessarily incurred prior to the effective date of
termination, unless the Notice of Termination is issued for cause, in which event the City may
withhold any disputed compensation. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for lost profits.
State of California
"CONTRACTOR'S" License No. ________________________
9
1293492.1
CONTRACTOR'S Business Phone:
CONTRACTOR'S emergency phone which can be reached at any time:
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this AGREEMENT with all
the formalities required by law on the respective dates set forth opposite their signatures.
By: ______________________________________
Title: _________________________________
Date:
By:
Title:
Date:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR, CALIFORNIA
By: _____________________________________
RUTH M. LOW, MAYOR
__________________________
Date
ATTEST:
By: _____________________________________
TOMMYE A. CRIBBINS, CITY CLERK
__________________________
Date
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
_____________________________________
DAVID A. DEBERRY, CITY ATTORNEY
_____________________________
Date
*NOTE: If Contractor is a corporation, the City requires the following signature(s):
-- The Chairman of the Board, the President or a Vice-President, AND (2) the
Secretary, the Chief Financial Officer, the Treasurer, an Assistant Secretary or an
Assistant Treasurer. If only one corporate officer exists or one corporate officer
holds more than one corporate office, please so indicate. OR
-- The corporate officer named in a corporate resolution as authorized to enter into
this Agreement. A copy of the corporate resolution, certified by the Secretary
close in time to the execution of the Agreement, must be provided to the City.
10
1293492.1
PART II
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1293492.1 GP-1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
FOR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
CITY PROJECT NO. FP23500 & FP23501
All work shall be done in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction (2021 Edition and all subsequent supplements), hereinafter referred to as
Standard Specifications; the State of California Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications (2021 Edition and all subsequent supplements), hereinafter referred to as
Caltrans Standard Specifications; Plans, Standard Construction Drawings; and these
Special Provisions.
MODIFICATIONS TO THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Section 1. General.
Section 1-7. Award and Execution of Contract
(a) Examination of Plans, Specifications, Special Provisions, and Site of Work: The
bidder is required to examine carefully the site and the proposal, plans,
specifications and contract forms for the work contemplated, and it will be assumed
that the bidder has investigated and is satisfied as to the conditions to be
encountered, including all installations and utilities, whether underground, surface
or overhead, as to the character, quality and quantities of work to be performed
and materials to be furnished, and as to the requirements of the specifications, the
special provisions and the Contract. It is mutually agreed that submission of a
proposal shall be considered prima facie evidence that the bidder has made such
examination.
(b) Proposal Form: All proposals must be made upon blank forms to be obtained from
the City Clerk at City Hall, 21810 Copley Drive, Diamond Bar, California. All
proposals must give the prices proposed, both in writing and figures, and must be
signed by the bidder, and his address shown. If the proposal is made by an
individual, his name and post office address must be shown. If made by a firm or
partnership, the name and post office address of each member of the firm or
partnership must be shown. If made by a corporation, the proposal must show the
name of the state under the laws of which the corporation was chartered and the
names, titles, and business addresses of the president, secretary, and treasurer.
(c) Rejection of Proposals Containing Alterations, Erasures or Irregularities:
Proposals may be rejected if they show any alterations or form additions not called
for, conditional or alternative proposals, incomplete proposals, erasures, or
irregularities of any kind.
(d) Bidder's Guarantee: All proposals shall be presented under sealed cover and shall
be accompanied by cash, cashier's check or certified check payable to, or bidder's
bond in favor of the City of Diamond Bar in an amount of not less than ten percent
(10%) of the amount named in said proposal, and no proposal shall be considered
1293492.1 GP-2
unless such cash, cashier's check, certified check or bidder's bond is enclosed
therewith.
(e) Return of Bidder's Guarantees: Proposal guarantees will be held until the Contract
has been finally executed, after which they will be returned to the respective
bidders whose proposals they accompany.
The Notice to Bidders, Proposal, bonds, Instructions to bidders, General Provisions
and Detail Specifications, shall be deemed incorporated in the Contract by reference.
A Corporation to which an award is made will be required, before the Contract is finally
executed, to furnish evidence of its corporate existence and evidence that the officer
signing the Contract and bonds for the corporation is duly authorized to do so.
Add the following section:
Subsection 1-7.3. Plans and Specifications
An addendum to these specifications may be issued by the City Engineer at any time
prior to the bid opening.
Section 2. Scope of the Work
Section 2-2. Permits
Add the following paragraph:
The Contractor and all subcontractors shall obtain and maintain a valid City business
license. The Contractor shall also obtain a no-fee "Encroachment Permit" from the Public
Works Department, Engineering Division. Both the permit and the license shall be valid
for the entire construction period and shall be kept at the job site at all times. All provisions
of the permit shall apply and shall have authority over any conditions contained herein
these Special Provisions. Any costs incurred due to compliance with the permit or in
obtaining a city business license or any other required permit or license shall be included
in the contract cost for the work item involved and no additional payment will be made.
Failure to comply with these specific licensing and permit requirements will result in
withholding of any progress payment(s) to the Contractor.
Section 2-11. Marking Removal
All markings placed by the Contractor, City, and Underground Service Alert (USA) during
construction shall be removed at the completion of the work. These markings shall
include, but not limited to, paint, stakes, and metal tags.
1293492.1 GP-3
Section 3. Control of the Work
Section 3-5. Inspection
The Contractor shall notify the City Engineer a minimum of five working days in advance
when a final inspection of the work is desired. If the City Engineer agrees that the work
is complete and ready for inspection, he will, as soon thereafter as possible, make the
necessary examinations. No final acceptance of the work shall be allowed until all check
(punch) list items to be rectified have been corrected and any subsequent final
inspections have been performed.
Section 3-12. Work Site Maintenance
Subsection 3-12.4.1 General
All costs associated with the disposal of all excavated or demolition materials, including
any gate fees, shall be paid by the Contractor. These costs shall be included in the bid
price for the applicable bid items.
Prior to any excavated or demolition material being removed from the construction site
the Contractor shall notify the City as to the hauling route and destination for disposal.
If the location for disposal is other than a county landfill then the Contractor shall
provide the City with written permission and release of liability for the City from the
owner of the property where the material will be deposited.
Subsection 3-12.4.2 Storage in Public Streets
Construction equipment shall not be stored at the construction site, any public street
or publicly owned facilities without approval of the City. Contractor shall store
equipment at a contractor’s rental yard.
All excavated material that is to be hauled to and disposed of at a County landfill site
by the Contractor is subject to a County gate fee based on tonnage.
Subsection 3-12.5.4
Any facilities, structures, water lines, landscaping, surfaces, signs, pavement
markings, painted curbs, house numbers, etc., which are damaged during construction
shall be restored to the satisfaction of the City. Damaged water lines shall be repaired
immediately at no additional cost to the city.
Add the following sections:
Section 3-12.7. NPDES Requirements
The contractor shall conform to the requirements of the National Pollutant Discharge
Elimination System (NPDES) Permit for Construction Activities, Municipal NPDES Permit.
1293492.1 GP-4
The Contractor shall protect by any means all construction related materials from being
discharged from the site by the forces of wind or water. Contractor and/or any
subcontractors shall implement erosion control measures, such as the placement of
gravel bags and fabric around all storm drain inlets and the job site, as directed by the
City Engineer, to protect polluted water from running into the storm drain systems.
Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of this section shall be considered
as included in the prices paid for the various contract items of work involved and no
additional compensation will be allowed.
Section 3-12.8. Environmental Provisions
In the event Contractor is required to dig any trench or excavation that extends deeper
than 4 feet below the surface in order to perform the work authorized under this contract,
Contractor agrees to promptly notify the City Engineer in writing and before further
disturbing the site, if any, of the conditions set forth below are discovered:
1. Materials that the Contractor believes may be hazardous waste, as defined in Section
25117 of the Health and Safety Code that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class
II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with the provisions of existing law.
2. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated.
3. Unknown physical condition at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from
those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work of the
character provided for in this Contract.
Section 4. Control of Materials
Section 4-1. General
The Contractor and all subcontractors, suppliers, and vendors, shall guarantee that the
entire work will meet all requirements of this contract as to the quality of materials,
equipment, and workmanship. The Contractor, at no cost to the City, shall make any
repairs or replacements made necessary by defects in materials, equipment, or
workmanship that become evident within 1 year after the date of acceptance of work.
Within this 1-year period, the Contractor shall also restore to full compliance with
requirements of this contract any portion of the work which is found to not meet those
requirements. The Contractor shall hold the City harmless from claims of any kind arising
from damages due to said defects or noncompliance. The Contractor shall make all
repairs, replacements, and restorations within 30 days after the date of the City Engineer's
written notice.
Section 4-4. Testing
Except as elsewhere specified, the City will bear the cost of materials testing and
independent acceptance testing. The cost of all other tests, including the retesting of
1293492.1 GP-5
materials and independent acceptance testing that fails to pass the first test, shall be
borne by the Contractor.
Section 5. Legal Relations and Responsibilities
Add the following section:
Section 5-8. Public Notification
Contractor shall comply with all applicable State, County and City requirements and any
additional public safety requirements which may arise in notifying the Police, Fire, Traffic
and Engineering Departments, Schools and Public Transit at least 48 hours in advance
of any closures, partial closures or reopening, and detours.
At least ten (10) calendar days prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall submit a
detailed schedule to the City Engineer for approval. Based on the schedule, the
Contractor will notify businesses, bus companies, trash and street sweeping companies,
and emergency services of the proposed work.
The City will require the Contractor to distribute two (2) “Public Notices” to each business
and residence affected by the program. The first notice shall be distributed to each
business and residence ten (10) calendar days prior to the start of any work. The second
notice shall be distributed at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the start of work. Said
notice shall be provided by the Contractor to the City Engineer for review and approval
prior to distribution by the Contractor.
All complaints received by the City associated with the construction alleging damage to
private property and vehicles shall be responded to by the Contractor within twenty-four
(24) hours of notification. Failure to comply with this provision may result in a penalty of
fifty dollars ($50.00) per occurrence.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintain notification signage in a serviceable
manner. Signs shall indicate the date and hours of restriction.
Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of this section shall be considered
as included in the price paid for various items of work involved and no additional
compensation will be allowed.
Section 6. Prosecution and Progress of the Work
Section 6-1. Construction Schedule and Commencement of the Work
Add the following sections:
Subsection 6-1.3. Utilities
Subsection 6-1.3.1. Location
1293492.1 GP-6
Utility Owner and Public Agency Identifications. Utility owners and Public Agencies
who may have facilities or interests, which may affect the work, are as follows:
Verizon Telephone
1400 E. Phillips Boulevard
Pomona, California 91766
(800) 227-2600 (DigAlert)
(909) 469-6354 (Office)
Waste Management
13940 East Live Oak Avenue
Baldwin Park, California 91706
(800) 266-7551
Valley Vista Services
16000 Temple Avenue
La Puente, California 91744
(800) 442-6454
Southern California Edison Co.
800 West Cienega Avenue
San Dimas, California 91773
(800) 227-2600 (DigAlert)
(800) 684-8123 (Office)
Southern California Gas Company
1919 South State College Boulevard
Anaheim, California 92803
(800) 227-2600 (DigAlert)
(800) 427-2200 (Office)
Walnut Valley Water District
271 South Brea Canyon Road
Walnut, California 91789
(909) 595-7554
Pomona Unified School District
800 South Garey Avenue
Pomona, California 91766
(909) 397-4800
Walnut Valley Unified School District
880 S. Lemon Ave.
Walnut, CA 91789
(909) 595-1261
Charter Communications (Spectrum)
1293492.1 GP-7
3430 E Miraloma Avenue
Anaheim, CA 92806
(844) 780-6054
Los Angeles County Department of Public Works
900 S. Fremont Ave.
Alhambra, CA 91803-1331
Operation Services
(626) 445-7630
Sewer Maintenance
(800) 675-4357
Los Angeles County Sheriff's Department
21695 E. Valley Blvd.
Walnut, California 91789
(909) 595-2264
Los Angeles County Fire Department
Station 119
20480 Pathfinder Road
Diamond Bar, California 91765
(909) 861-5995
Los Angeles County Fire Department
Station 121
346 Armitos Place
Diamond Bar, California 91765
(909) 396-0164
Metropolitan Water – La Verne
Substructures Team
P.O. Box 54153 Terminal Annex
Los Angeles, CA 90054
(213) 217-6679
Los Angeles County Fire Department
Station 120
1051 S Grand Ave
Diamond Bar, CA 91765
(323) 881-2411 (non-emergencies)
911 (emergencies)
The Contractor shall notify each of the above listed utility companies and agencies
in writing (copy to City) of the project. They shall be invited to a pre-construction
meeting and provided a work schedule.
1293492.1 GP-8
Subsection 6-1.3.2. Protection
The Contractor is hereby alerted to the existence of utility lines. The Contractor shall
carefully protect all lines during the course of construction.
Subsection 6-1.4. Work Hours and Sound Control
Daytime work hours shall be 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Monday - Friday. Saturday work
hours, if permitted at least one week (7 Calendar Days) in advance by the City Engineer,
shall be 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.
The contractor will submit a detailed construction schedule for City staff review and
approval. It should be noted that the facilities and work areas are in use by the public and
the contractor will be precluded from working on certain days or periods of time.
The bidders will submit bid prices for this project with the understanding that schedule
and periods of work will be impacted by unavoidable public uses from time to time.
Nighttime work hours are not required but will be permitted at the request of the contractor
with the City Engineer’s authorization. Contractor shall request nighttime work hours at
least 1 week (7 calendar days) prior to beginning the proposed nighttime work operations.
The Contractor shall comply with all County and local sound control and noise level rules,
regulations, and ordinances which apply to any work performed pursuant to the contract,
and shall make every effort to control any undue noise resulting from the construction
operation.
Each internal combustion engine used for any purpose on the job or related to the job
shall be equipped with a muffler of a type recommended by the manufacturer. No internal
combustion engine shall be operated on the project without said muffler.
The City Engineer reserves the right to stop work if he determines that these conditions
are being violated.
Section 6-2. Prosecution of the Work
Add the following sections:
Subsection 6-2.1. Order of Work
The order of work, except where otherwise specifically required by the Plans and
Specifications, shall be determined by the Contractor who shall be solely responsible for
coordinating all subcontract and prime contract work to minimize delays during
construction.
The Contractor shall schedule his work in order to be as least disruptive as possible to
adjacent businesses and residents.
1293492.1 GP-9
Subsection 6-2.2. Responsibilities of the Contractor in Conduct of His Work
Subsection 6-2.2.1. Labor is amended by the addition of the following:
Labor Discrimination. No discrimination shall be made in the employment of such
persons upon public works because of the race, color, or religion of such persons and
every contractor for public works violating this section is subject to all the penalties
imposed for a violation of Chapter 11 or Part VII, Division 2 of the Labor Code in
accordance with the provisions of Section 1735 thereof.
Subsection 6-2.2.2. Contractor's Responsibility for Work
Reference is made to Section 6 - 8 of the Standard Specifications and these General
Provisions. Except as provided above, until the formal acceptance of the work by the
City Council, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall bear the
risk of injury or damage to any part thereof by the action of the elements or from any
other case, whether arising from the execution or from the non-execution of the work.
The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all injuries or damages to
any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before final acceptance
and shall bear the expense thereof, except such injuries or damages occasioned by
acts of the Federal Government or the public enemy.
Subsection 6-2.3. Public Convenience and Safety
Subsection 6-2.3.1. Traffic and Access
The Contractor shall furnish all flagmen and guards and supply and install all signs,
lights, flares, barricade delineators, and other facilities which are necessary to expedite
the passage of public traffic through or around the work or to prevent accidents or
damage or injury to the public or to give adequate warning to the public of any
dangerous conditions to be encountered. The California Manual of Uniform Traffic
Control Devices (MUTCD), latest edition and Work Area Traffic Control Handbook
(WATCH), latest edition shall be used for all traffic control on this project.
Subsection 6-2.3.2. Protection of the Public
It is part of the service required of the Contractor to make whatever provisions are
necessary to protect the public. The Contractor shall use foresight and shall take such
steps and precautions as his operations warrant to protect the public from danger, loss
of life or loss of property, which would result from interruption or contamination of the
public water supply, interruption of other public service, or from the failure of partly
completed work or partially removed facilities. Unusual conditions may arise on the
work which will require that immediate and unusual provisions be made to protect the
public from danger or loss, or damage to life and property, due directly or indirectly to
prosecution of work under this contract.
1293492.1 GP-10
Whenever, in the opinion of the City Engineer, an emergency exists against which the
Contractor has not taken sufficient precaution for the public safety, protection of utilities
and protection of adjacent structures or property which may be damaged by the
Contractor's operations in the opinion of the City Engineer, immediate action shall be
considered necessary in order to protect the public or property due to the Contractor's
operations under this contract, the City Engineer will order the Contractor to provide a
remedy for the unsafe condition. If the Contractor fails to act on the situation within a
reasonable time period, the City Engineer may provide suitable protection to said
interests by causing such work to be done and material to be furnished as, in the
opinion of the City Engineer, may seem reasonable and necessary.
The cost and expense of said labor and material, together with the cost and expense
of such repairs as are deemed necessary, shall be borne by the Contractor. All
expenses incurred by the Cityfor emergency repairs will be deducted from the progress
payments and the final payment due to the Contractor. However, if the City does not
take such remedial measures, the Contractor is not relieved of the full responsibility for
public safety.
Subsection 6-2.4. Recycling of Material
Subsection 6-2.4.1. Recycle of Asphalt Concrete, Portland Cement Concrete
The City is committed to recycling program. It is the obligation of the contractor, under
this contract, to recycle the waste material through an approved recycling plant.
Records and report of waste material will be submitted to the City of Diamond Bar on
a regular monthly basis. The construction and demolition requirements of the City has
been provided in Appendix _ for further information.
Section 6-9 Liquidated Damages
The amount of liquidated damages is hereby amended to $2,000 for each consecutive
calendar day.
Section 7. Measurement and Payment
Section 7-3. Payment
Subsection 7-3.1. General
Payment for the various items of the Bid Schedule, as further specified herein, shall
include all compensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing all tools,
equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and
incidentals appurtenant to the items of work being described, as necessary to complete
the various items of work, all in accordance with the provisions for Measurement and
1293492.1 GP-11
Payment in the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions, and as shown on
the Drawings, Exhibits, and spreadsheets including all appurtenances thereto, and
including all costs of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having
jurisdiction, including the Safety and Health Requirements of the California Division of
Industrial Safety and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the U.S.
Department of Labor (OSHA).
No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in the Bid
Schedule, and all costs therefore shall be included in the prices named in the Bid
Schedule for the various appurtenant items of work.
The Contractor agrees that the payment of the amount under the Contract, and the
adjustment and payment for any work done in accordance with any alterations of the
same, shall release the City of Diamond Bar, the City Council, the City Manager, and the
City Engineer of any and all claims or liability on account of work performed under the
Contract or any alterations thereof.
Guarantee. The Contractor agrees for a period of one year, commencing with the Final
Notice of Completion, to correct without additional charge to the City, any defects in the
work performed, or in the materials furnished, by the Contractor and/or manufacturer,
jointly.
Subsection 7-3.2. Partial and Final Payment
Progress Payments. The Contractor shall be entitled each month to a monthly progress
payment in an amount equal to ninety-five percent (95%) of the estimated percentage of
actual work completed by the end of the preceding calendar month, based on the contract
price less all previous payments. Subject to the provisions of Section 22300 of the Public
Contract Code, a five percent (5%) retention will be withheld from each payment. All
invoices and detailed pay requests shall be approved by the City Engineer before
submittal to the City for payment. All billings shall be directed to the City Engineer. In all
events, the City shall withhold no less than five percent (5%) of the contract price until
final completion and acceptance of the work.
This payment on account shall in no way be considered as an acceptance of any part of
the work or material of the Contract, nor shall it in any way govern the final estimate.
Acceptance of any progress payment accompanying any estimate without written protest
shall be an acknowledgment by the Contractor that the number of accumulated contract
days shown on the associated statement of working days is correct. Progress payments
made by the City to the Contractor after the completion date of the Contract shall not
constitute a waiver of liquidated damages.
The Contractor shall submit with its invoice the Contractor's conditional waiver of lien for
the entire amount covered by such invoice; valid unconditional waivers of lien from the
Contractor and all subcontractors and material-men for all work and materials included in
any prior invoices;
1293492.1 GP-12
Waivers of lien shall be in the forms prescribed by California Civil Code Section 3262.
Prior to final payment by the City, the Contractor shall submit a final waiver of lien for the
Contractor's work, together with releases of lien from any subcontractor or material-men.
Final Payments. After the completion of the Contract, the City Engineer shall make a final
inspection of the work done thereunder, and if entirely satisfactory and complete, the City
shall pay to the Contractor an amount which, when added to the payments previously
made and deductions allowable to the City, will equal ninety-five percent (95%) of the
contract price. Thereafter the balance of the contract price remaining unpaid shall be
paid thirty-five (35) calendar days after the recording of a Notice of Completion by the
City. The payment of the final amount due under the Contract and the adjustment and
payment for any work done in accordance with any alterations of the same shall release
the City from any and all claims on account of the work performed under the Contract or
any alterations thereof. Final payment to Contractor shall be withheld for at least 30 days
after the time in which Contractor has verified, to the City's satisfaction, that it has
submitted all information to the Department of Industrial Relations required by Labor Code
§1773.3.
Subsection 7-3.5. Contract Unit Prices
Subsection 7-3.5.1. General
All pay items will be paid for at the unit prices named in the Bid Schedule for the
respective items of work. The quantities of work or material stated as unit price
items on the Bid Schedule are stated only to give an indication of the general
scope of the work. The City does not expressly, nor by implication, agree that
the actual amount of work or material will correspond therewith, and reserves
the right after the award of Contract to increase or decrease the quantity of any
unit price item of work, and shall have the right to delete any Bid Item in its
entirety, or to add additional Bid Items.
Add the following sections:
Section 7-6. Final Cleanup and Closeout
Upon completion of the work, and before acceptance and final payment is made by the
City, the Contractor shall clean the project site and areas occupied by him in connection
with the work. All rubbish, excess materials, falsework, temporary structures, and
equipment shall be removed; and all parts of the work shall be left in a neat and
presentable condition.
Prior to final closeout, the Contractor shall submit the following:
A. A complete set of as-built/record plans showing constructed conditions, materials,
revisions, finishes, etc. for the Project.
1293492.1 GP-13
B. A complete file of operation and maintenance manuals for equipment and
materials used in the work. Such file shall be bound in hardcover, three-ring
binders and shall be labeled.
C. Required written guarantees.
D. Complete list of subcontractors and principal vendors engaged in the execution of
the work, including addresses and telephone numbers.
Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of this Section shall be considered as
included in the contract bid price paid for the various items of work and no additional
compensation will be allowed therefor. Failure to conform to these requirements may result
in the City withholding the full retention payment.
Section 7-7. Payment for Bid Items
See “Technical Provisions” section of these Specifications.
1293492.1
PART III
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1293492.1 SP-1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
FOR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
CITY PROJECT NO. FP23500 & FP23501
SPECIFICATIONS
The work to be done shall be performed or executed in accordance with these Special
Provisions and the "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", 2021 Edition
and all subsequent supplements, hereinafter referred to as the Standard Specifications. The
Standard Specifications are published by Building News, Inc. 10801 National Boulevard,
Suite 100, Los Angeles, California 90034 and are included by reference only.
LOCATION OF WORK
Diamond Bar Center located at 1600 Grand Avenue in the City of Diamond Bar.
ADDENDA
The City Engineer may, without City Council approval, issue addenda to the Contract
Documents during the period of advertising for bids for the purpose of: (a) revising prevailing
wage scales or (b) clarifying or correcting Special Provisions, Plans or Bid Proposal; provided
that any such addenda does not change the original scope and intent of the project.
Purchasers of contract documents will be notified and furnished copies of such addenda,
either by certified mail or personal delivery, during the period of advertising.
TIME LIMIT AND NOTICE TO PROCEED
All work shall be completed within eighty (80) working days. A move-in period of seven (7)
calendar days will be allowed starting on the date in the Notice to Proceed. The counting of
working days shall start on the date the Contractor elects to start work or the last day of the
move-in period, whichever occurs first. The Contractor shall utilize the move-in period to
ensure that all materials required for the project will be available for the scheduled work. No
additional working days will be allowed for material delay once the Contractor commences
work. The contractor shall begin construction within one week from the date of project award
by City. The Notice to Proceed will be issued immediately after the project award and working
days will be counted starting on the first date of construction start. Upon exhaustion of
stipulated working days, liquidated damages will be assessed per each calendar day of
delay.
Nothing in this section will relieve the Contractor of its obligations relative to starting work as
required elsewhere in these specifications.
1293492.1 SP-2
CHANGES IN THE WORK
Subsection 2-7.1 of the Standard Specifications is replaced by the following:
Notwithstanding the limitation imposed by this Subsection, the City Engineer may,
with City Council approval, order changes in the work which increase the contract
cost by not more than ten percent (10%) of the original contract amount.
CONTRACTOR'S INDUSTRIAL SAFETY RECORD
All bidders will be required to submit information as to their industrial safety record on the
form provided in the Bid Proposal. A review of this safety record will be made prior to a
determination of the lowest responsible bidder, and any adverse finding as to the bidder's
safety record or any bid submitted which does not contain the Contractor's Industrial Safety
Record, filled out and signed by the Contractor, may be sufficient cause for rejection of the
bid.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
In accordance with Subsection 6-1 of the Standard Specifications, the Contractor shall submit
a written proposed construction schedule to the City Engineer ten (10) calendar days prior to
the start of work. Such schedule shall be subject to the review and approval by the City
Engineer. No work shall be done until the City Engineer and the Contractor have agreed to
the schedule to be followed by the Contractor.
WITHHELD CONTRACT FUNDS
Pursuant to Section 4590 of the Government Code, the Contractor at its own expense may
deposit securities pledged in favor of the City with a state or federally chartered bank as the
escrow agent.
The acceptable securities are those listed in Section 16430 of the Government Code or bank
or savings and loan certificates of deposit.
The amount of securities to be deposited shall be equivalent to the maximum amount
permitted to be withheld as specified in Subsection 9-3.2 of the Standard Specifications.
Formal acceptance of the project by the City terminates the City’s interest in the securities.
PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY
In addition to the requirements of Subsection 6-2.3-10 of the General Provisions, the
Contractor shall maintain access to all adjacent properties. Furthermore, this subsection is
amended and supplemented by the following paragraphs:
1293492.1 SP-3
Full compensation for complying with the above requirements shall be considered as
included in the various items of work unless otherwise specified above
CONSTRUCTION WATER
Construction water is available from the Walnut Valley Water District (WVWD) by applying
for a temporary meter, which will be installed and chained to a hydrant by WVWD. Contact
WVWD at telephone (909) 595-7554 to apply for construction water. Contractor to verify
current charges.
SANITARY CONVENIENCE
Necessary sanitary facilities for the use of workman on the job shall be provided and
maintained in an approved manner by the Contractor, properly secluded from public
observation and in compliance with health ordinances and laws, and their use shall be strictly
enforced by the Contractor.
STORAGE SITE
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to locate any storage sites for materials and
equipment needed and such sites either located on public or private property must be
approved in advance by the City Engineer.
No equipment or materials shall be stored in the public roadway right-of-way without prior
written approval from the City Engineer.
SPECIAL INSPECTION FEES
If the Contractor elects to work under this contract more than 8 hours/day or more than 40
hours/week, Saturday, Sunday, or CITY holidays, the Contractor shall arrange with the City
Engineer for the required inspection service and pay the Special Inspection Fees which will
be charged at the following rates:
Monday through Fridays - $100.00 per hour
Saturday, Sunday, Holidays - $1000.00 per day
Fees may be deducted from payments due to the Contractor at the discretion of the City
Engineer.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
The City shall arrange a pre-construction meeting with the Contractor and representatives
from utility companies, which shall be held a minimum of ten (10) calendar days prior to
commencement of any work.
1293492.1 SP-4
TRASH COLLECTION SCHEDULE
Questions regarding trash collection can be directed to:
Waste Management Valley Vista Services
(626) 856-1285 (800)442-6454
(818) 960-7551
REMOVAL OF MATERIALS
Materials, which are to be disposed of, include, but are not limited to:
saw-cut asphalt pavement and concrete removed for curb and gutter shall not be stored
at the site but shall be removed immediately. No overnight storage of materials or debris
will be allowed in the street area or surrounding areas.
COMPETENCY OF BIDDER
The bidder shall be licensed under the provisions of Chapter 9, Division 3, of the Business
and Professions Code of the State of California to do the type of work contemplated in the
Contract and shall be skilled and regularly engaged in the general class or type of work called
for under this Contract. The Contractor shall possess a State of California Class A
Contractor’s License or a combination of Class C Specialty Contractor’s License(s) adequate
to perform the work herein described and be registered with the Department of Industrial
Relations per California Labor Code Section 1771.1. All subcontractors shall have equivalent
licenses for their specific trades.
BID QUANTITIES
The quantities given in the Proposal and Contract form are approximate, being given as a
basis for the comparison of bids only, and the city does not, expressly or by implication, agree
that the actual amount of work will correspond therewith, but reserves the right to increase
or decrease the amount of any class or portion of the work, or to omit any portion of the work,
as may be deemed advisable or necessary by the City Engineer.
CITY EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EEO) PROVISIONS
1. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN FOR EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
The following provisions pertaining to equal employment opportunity are incorporated
into this Contract. In connection with performance of work under this Contract, the
Contractor agrees as follows:
a. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment
because of race, color, sex, religion, ancestry or national origin. The Contractor
will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and the
employees are treated during employment, without regard to race, color, sex,
religion, ancestry or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited
1293492.1 SP-5
to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or
recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of
compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship where
applicable.
b. In all advertisements for labor or other personnel, or requests for employment of any
nature, the Contractor shall state that all qualified applicants will receive
consideration for employment of any nature, the Contractor shall state that all
qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to
race, color, sex, religion, ancestry or national origin.
c. In all hiring, the Contractor shall make every effort to hire qualified workers from all
races and ethnic groups.
d. The Contractor shall be responsible for the compilation of records of the ethnic
distribution of the entire project work force on forms furnished by the City. Said
forms, indicating the ethnic distribution of man-hours of work within the various
crafts and trades, shall be filed by the Contractor with the City every thirty (30)
days.
e. The Contractor shall send to each labor union or representative of workers with which
it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a
notice, to be provided by the City, advising the said labor union or worker's
representative of the Contractor's commitments under this section.
f. The Contractor shall maintain and permit access by the City to records of employment,
employment advertisements, application forms and other pertinent data and
records of the Contractor's own work force and that of the various
subcontractors on the project for the purpose of investigation to ascertain
compliance with this EEO section.
g. Within ten (10) days after execution of the Contract by the City, the Contractor shall
meet the following standards for affirmative compliance and shall ensure that
each subcontractor on the project will meet these requirements within ten (10)
days after receiving a Notice to Proceed from the Contractor, unless the City
provides for a greater time period:
(1)File with the City an Affirmative Action Plan indicating the steps it will take
to encourage and assist qualified members of minority groups. Such
affirmative action will include statements regarding recruitment,
employment, compensation, promotion or demotion, and selection for
training.
(2)Provide evidence as required by the City that it has notified in writing all
subcontractors, the Contractor's supervisors and other personnel
officers of the content of this EEO section and their responsibilities under
it.
1293492.1 SP-6
(3)Provide evidence, as required by the City that it has notified in writing all
sources of employee referrals (including, but not limited to, unions,
employment agencies and the State Department of Employment
Development) of the content of this EEO section.
(4)Notify the City in writing of any opposition to this EEO section by individuals,
firms, unions or organizations.
h. If the City has reason to believe that the Contractor or a subcontractor may have
committed a violation of the EEO section of this Contract or of the California
Fair Employment Practice Act or of any applicable Federal law concerning
equal employment practices on this project, the City will cause written notice to
be served on the Contractor or its representative, and to any subcontractor
involved in such violation. The notice shall set forth the nature of the violation.
Upon the City’s request, the Contractor shall meet with representatives of the
City in order to determine the means of correcting the violation and the time
period within which the violation shall be corrected. If, within ten (10) days, the
Contractor or subcontractor has failed or refused to remedy the violation, the
City may notify the Fair Employment Practices Commission and pursue any
other remedies, which may be available under the law.
i. The Contractor shall include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs 1a through 1h
in every first tier subcontract and require each subcontractor to bind each
further subcontractor with whom it has a contract to such provisions, so that
such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor who performs any of
the work required by the Contract.
2. ANTI-DISCRIMINATION
a. The Contractor certifies and agrees that all persons employed by the Contractor, its
affiliates, subsidiaries or holding companies are and will be treated equally by
the Contractor without regard to or because of race, color, sex, religion,
ancestry or national origin and in compliance with State and Federal anti-
discrimination laws. The Contractor further certifies and agrees that it will deal
with its subcontractors, bidders and vendors without regard to or because of
race, color, sex, religion, ancestry or national origin. The Contractor agrees to
allow access to its employment records during regular business hours to verify
compliance with the foregoing provisions when so requested by the City.
b. The Contractor specifically recognizes and agrees that if the City finds that any of the
foregoing provisions have been violated, the same shall constitute a material
breach of Contract upon which the City may determine to cancel, terminate or
suspend the Contract. While the City reserves the right to determine
individually that the anti-discrimination provisions of the Contract have been
violated, in addition a determination by the California Fair Employment
Practices Commission or the Federal Equal Employment Opportunity
Commission that the Contractor has violated State or Federal anti-
1293492.1 SP-7
discrimination laws shall constitute a finding by the City that the Contractor has
violated the anti-discrimination provisions of the Contract.
c. At its option, and in lieu of canceling, terminating or suspending the Contract, the City
may impose damages for any violation of the anti-discrimination provisions of
this section, in the amount of two hundred ($200.00) for each violation found
and determined. The City and the Contractor specifically agree that the
aforesaid amount shall be imposed as liquidated damages, and not as a
forfeiture or penalty. It is further specifically agreed that the aforesaid amount
is presumed to be the amount of damages sustained by reason of any such
violation, because, from the circumstances and the nature of the violation, it is
impracticable and extremely difficult to fix actual damages.
1293492.1 TP-1
PART IV
TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
1293492.1 TP-2
TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
FOR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
CITY PROJECT NO. FP23500 & FP23501
BID ITEMS
Each respective bid item as shown on the proposal form shall comply with the respective
section of the 2021 edition of Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, its
supplements, and any other publication as specified or listed in the General Conditions. If
there is a conflict between these Technical Provisions and the Standard Specifications,
these Technical Provisions shall have precedence.
Incidental Work - All work and materials required by the plans and specifications, and not
specifically listed in the bid schedule items of work, shall be considered incidental and no
additional payment shall be made therefore. Incidental items shall include, but not be
limited to implementation of the water pollution control and Best Management Practices for
the protection of storm drain structures; saw cutting; excavation and disposal of materials;
and coordination of utilities.
ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS AND PROVISIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PBLA TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
TOC-1
DOCUMENT 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 SUMMARY
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200 REFERENCES
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300 EXECUTION
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
072500 WEATHER BARRIERS
075400 ROOFING MENBRANE (TPO)
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 – WINDOWS AND DOORS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
081400 WOOD DOORS
084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED WINDOWS
087100 DOOR HARDWARE
088000 GLAZING
088813 FIRE RATED GLASS
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
260000 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Phased construction.
4. Work under separate contracts.
5. Contractor's use of site and premises.
6. Coordination with occupants.
7. Work restrictions.
8. Specification and Drawing conventions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing
temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.2
PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: LeBard Park Improvements.
1. Project Location: 16500 Grand Ave. Diamond Bar, CA 91765
B. Owner: City of Diamond Bar 21810 Copley Dr. Diamond Bar, CA 91765
1. Owner's Representative: Jason Williams
C. Architect: PBLA Engineering Inc., 1481 Ford Street, Suite 201, Redlands, CA 92373.
1. Architect's Representative: Matt Evans. P: (909) 888-9642. E: mevans@pbla.biz.
1.3
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. New addition for new sliding entry door and new door hardware throughout existing facility. new
light control panels and framed light coves with new fixtures in existing banquet room. new down
lights and wall sconces in existing banquet room.
B. Type of Contract:
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
[Type here]
1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION
A. The Work shall be conducted in one phase with add alternates.
B. Before commencing Work, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing
the sequence, commencement and completion dates for the Work.
1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out
smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate
the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Unrestricted Use of Site: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations
during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Limits on Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of
Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Driveways, Walkways, and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear
and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or for storage of materials.
C. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping
affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by
construction operations.
1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy
and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion
of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement
of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets, work on public streets, rights of way, and other
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances,
operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
D. Smoking and Controlled Substance Restrictions: Use of tobacco products, alcoholic beverages, and
other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words
"shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon
(:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Text Color: Text used in the Specifications, including units of measure, manufacturer and
product names, and other text may appear in multiple colors or underlined as part of a hyperlink;
no emphasis is implied by text with these characteristics.
3. Hypertext: Text used in the Specifications may contain hyperlinks. Hyperlinks may allow for
access to linked information that is not residing in the Specifications. Unless otherwise
indicated, linked information is not part of the Contract Documents.
4. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B. Division 00 Contracting Requirements: General provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to all Sections of the Specifications.
C. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all
Sections in the Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
012500 - 1
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are
not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A, "Substitution Request", or
Contractor's comparable form.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method
cannot be provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those
of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification
Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance,
weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics,
warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate
deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication
and installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
012500 - 2
f. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and
addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, From ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the
overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot
be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on
manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of
availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in
substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate
for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed
substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for
substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed
substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of
additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
proposed substitution within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to
perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.5 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of
need for change, but not less than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and
review of related submittals.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
012500 - 3
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
a. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the
Contract Documents.
b. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
c. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that
specified product provided for compliance with CGBC requirements.
d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform
and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all
contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,
energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional
responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may
include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services,
increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that
specified product provided for compliance with CGBC requirements.
e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
012500 - 4
k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform
and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all
contractors involved.
END OF SECTION 012500
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
013300 - 1
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Submittal schedule requirements.
2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's
responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological
order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time
required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time
for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1.4 SUBMITTAL FORMATS
A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Architect.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section
number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for
resubmittals.
8. Category and type of submittal.
9. Submittal purpose and description.
10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for
each of multiple items.
11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
013300 - 2
12. Indication of full or partial submittal.
13. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
14. Other necessary identification.
15. Remarks.
16. Signature of transmitter.
B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include
relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate
sheet.
D. Paper Submittals:
1. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification; include
name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title
block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial
submittal may serve as final submittal.
4. Action Submittals: Submit not less than five paper copies of each submittal unless
otherwise indicated. Architect will return not less than two copies.
a. Submit two additional copies to Owner's Commissioning Authority when required
by Contract Documents.
5. Informational Submittals: Submit not less than five `paper copies of each submittal
unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return not less than two copies.
a. Submit two additional copies to Owner's Commissioning Authority when required
by Contract Documents.
6. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately
for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using AIA Document G810,
"Transmittal Letter", CSI Form 12.1A, "Submittal Transmittal", or Contractor's
comparable form.
7. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a Project Record Document file.
E. PDF Submittals:
1. Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF
file. Name PDF file with submittal number.
2. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial
submittal may serve as final submittal.
4. Action Submittals: Architect will return annotated file.
a. Submit additional copy to Owner's Commissioning Authority when required by
Contract Documents.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
013300 - 3
5. Informational Submittals: Architect will return annotated file.
a. Submit additional copy to Owner's Commissioning Authority when required by
Contract Documents.
6. Transmittal for PDF Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and
appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using AIA
Document G810. "Transmittal Letter", CSI Form 12.1A, "Submittal
Transmittal", or Contractor's comparable form.
7. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a digital Project Record Document file.
1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Contractor may provide paper submittals or PDF submittals at his option.
B. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of
submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Paper Submittals: Prepare submittals in paper form, and deliver to Architect. Include
paper transmittal form.
2. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Architect by
sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line
as requested by Architect.
C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal
schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same
Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
D. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance
of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
E. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
F. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance
of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
G. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
013300 - 4
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of
product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are
unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data unless submittal
based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Paper Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), and not
more than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).
a. Submit not less than five opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return
not less than two copies.
C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other materials.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
013300 - 5
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes
the following:
a. Project name and submittal number.
b. Generic description of Sample.
c. Product name and name of manufacturer.
d. Sample source.
e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. Paper Transmittal: Include paper transmittal including complete submittal information
indicated.
4. PDF Transmittal: Include digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may
be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at
time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
6. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units
or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit not less than two full sets of available choices
where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be
selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with
options selected.
7. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified,
and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full
range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited
to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small
cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials;
swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used
for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit not less than five sets of Samples. Architect will
retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.
1) Submit not less than one Sample where assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar
characteristics are to be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit not less than five
sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
b. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record Sample.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
013300 - 6
D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and
experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance
with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include
list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide
name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of
submittal.
G. Certificates:
1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes
signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign
documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.
2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and,
where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract
Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and
personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of
Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS
forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
H. Test and Research Reports:
1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility
tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for
substrate preparation and primers required.
2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field
tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in
its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material
for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency,
on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests
performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance
requirements in the Contract Documents.
5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product
produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by
a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
013300 - 7
6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building
code in effect for Project. Include the following information:
a. Name of evaluation organization.
b. Date of evaluation.
c. Time period when report is in effect.
d. Product and manufacturers' names.
e. Description of product.
f. Test procedures and results.
g. Limitations of use.
1.7 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and not less than five paper copies
of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and
system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for
coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents.
Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to
Architect.
B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform
approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement
certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the
Contract Documents.
1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have
Contractor's review and approval.
2. Architect will return without review or discard submittals received from Contractor that
do not have Contractor's review and approval.
1.9 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions
required, and return it.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
013300 - 8
1. Paper Submittals: Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will
mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
2. PDF Submittals: Architect will insert an action stamp in each submittal and will mark
stamp appropriately to indicate action
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate if it does or does
not comply with requirements, and return it.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, will not be
reviewed, and will be returned by Architect without action or will be discarded.
E. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will not be reviewed, and will be
returned by Architect without action or will be discarded.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed, and will be
returned by Architect without action or will be discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014000 - 1
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services
required by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction
are not limited by provisions of this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further
described means having successfully completed not less than five previous projects similar in
nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and
having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site
for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a Work result does not require that certain
construction activities specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding
temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify
selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of
materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between
dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances.
Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the
standard by which the Work will be judged.
1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed and tested at testing
facility to verify performance characteristics.
2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope constructed on-site as
freestanding temporary built elements or as indicated in-place portions of permanent
construction, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies, with
cutaways enabling inspection of concealed portions of the Work.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014000 - 2
a. Include each system, assembly, component, and part of the exterior wall and roof
to be constructed for the Project. Colors of components shall be those selected
by the Architect for use in the Project.
3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and
ceiling finishes; doors; windows; millwork; casework; specialties; furnishings and
equipment; and lighting.
4. Product Mockups: Mockups that may include multiple products, materials, or systems
specified in a single Section.
5. In-Place Mockups: Mockups constructed on-site in their actual final location as part
of permanent construction.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria. Unless otherwise indicated, copies of reports of tests or inspections
performed for other than the Project do not meet this definition.
F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to
NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
G. Source Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed at the
source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall have the same meaning as testing agency.
I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not
include contract administration activities performed by Architect.
1.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Statement: Submit a statement, signed and sealed by the
responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to
Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and
systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes,
loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014000 - 3
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards
or requirements is specified and the standards or requirements establish different or
conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, inform the Architect
regarding the conflict and obtain clarification prior to proceeding with the Work. Refer
conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for clarification
before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall
be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable
limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or
maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect
for a decision before proceeding.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Mockup Shop Drawings: For mockups.
1. Include plans, sections, elevations, and details, indicating materials and size of
mockup construction.
2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction
before starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in
the Statement of Special Inspections.
2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the
Statement of Special Inspections.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form
of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for
fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014000 - 4
3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspection.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making
report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
6. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and
inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized
service representative making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
4. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required;
individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014000 - 5
D. Installer/Applicator/Erector Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing,
applying, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material,
design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall
be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
G. Testing and Inspecting Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent
agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated,
as documented according to ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in
individual Sections
1. Testing and inspecting agency shall be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
when required by authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect
installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project.
I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect, demonstrate, repair,
and perform service on installations of manufacturer's products that are similar in material,
design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction
testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods,
comply with the following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and
construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and
analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies,
mockups, and laboratory mockups unless otherwise indicated; do not reuse
products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Commissioning
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014000 - 6
Authority, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each
report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the
Contract Documents.
K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
3. Notify Architect not less than seven days in advance of dates and times when
mockups will be constructed.
4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ
workers that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at
Project.
5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups prior to starting corresponding work,
fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
7. Promptly correct unsatisfactory conditions noted by Architect's preliminary
review, to the satisfaction of the Architect, before completion of final mockup.
8. Approval of mockups by the Architect does not constitute approval of deviations
from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
9. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
10. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup as required in
individual Specification Sections. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials
and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along
with supporting materials. Comply with requirements in "Mockups" Paragraph.
1. Coordinate construction of the mockup to allow observation of air barrier
installation, flashings, air barrier integration with fenestration systems, and other
portions of the building air/moisture barrier and drainage assemblies, prior to
installation of veneer, cladding elements, and other components that will obscure
the work.
1.9 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's
responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they
are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by
Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor,
and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014000 - 7
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or
not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.
1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.
2.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed
to in writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies not less than 24 hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspection will be performed.
4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having
jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were
Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and
reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract
Documents.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority, and
Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests
and inspections.
1. Notify Architect, Structural Engineer, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor
promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of
its services.
2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ
tests are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested
and inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service to Architect, Structural Engineer, Commissioning Authority,
and Contractor.
a. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having
jurisdiction, when they so direct.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.
7. Retest and reinspect corrected work.
E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures."
F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of
completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014000 - 8
G. Contractor's Associated Requirements and Services: Cooperate with agencies and
representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services,
and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in
advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by
testing agency.
6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-
assurance and quality- control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity
of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency and special
inspector(s) to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having
jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. Testing agency and special inspector(s) shall:
1. Verify that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control
procedures and review the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to
perform the Work.
2. Notify Architect, Structural Engineer, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor
promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during
performance of its services.
3. Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service to Architect, Structural Engineer, Commissioning Authority, and
Contractor.
a. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities
having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
4. Submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies to Architect, Structural Engineer,
Commissioning Authority, and Contractor.
a. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities
having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
5. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retest and reinspect corrected Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014000 - 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect, Structural
Engineer, Commissioning Authority, Contractor, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.n
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to
test and inspection log for Architect's, Structural Engineer's, Commissioning Authority's, and
authorities' having jurisdiction reference during normal working hours.
1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as
invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting
and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014200 - 1
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Definitions.
2. Industry Standards.
3. Abbreviations and Acronyms.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Contract Documents": Documents that are a legal part of the contract and describe the Work.
They include, but are not limited to, the Agreement (Contract), General Conditions of the
Contract, Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Addenda, Change Orders, Specifications,
and Drawings. They are intended to be complimentary, what is required by one is as binding
as if required by all. What is shown or required, or may be reasonably inferred to be required,
or which is usually and customarily provided for similar work, shall be included in the Work.
D. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
E. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
F. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that
control performance of the Work.
G. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
H. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to
dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
I. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
J. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014200 - 2
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the
Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
1. For standards referenced by applicable building codes, comply with dates of standards as
listed in building codes.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry
standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with
the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Abbreviations and acronyms not included in this list shall mean the recognized name of the entities
indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia
Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." The information in this list
is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.
2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.
3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.
4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.transportation.org.
5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.
6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.
7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com.
8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org.
9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.
11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.
12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.
14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.
15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.
16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.
19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.
20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.
21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014200 - 3
23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.
24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.
25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.
26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.
30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE).
31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;
www.ashrae.org.
32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org.
33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.
34. ASSP - American Society of Safety Professionals (The); www.assp.org.
35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org.
36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
37. AVIXA - Audiovisual and Integrated Experience Association; (Formerly: Infocomm
International); www.soundandcommunications.com.
38. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.
39. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.
40. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com.
41. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com.
42. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
43. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.
44. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.
45. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.
46. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.
47. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association); www.bifma.org.
48. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.
49. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);
www.bissc.org.
50. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.
51. CE - Conformite Europeenne; http://ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/ce-marking/.
52. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.
53. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.
54. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.
55. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.
56. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.
57. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.
58. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
59. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
60. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.compositepanel.org.
61. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.
62. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.
63. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
64. CSA - CSA Group; www.csa-group.org.
65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csiresources.org.
66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.
67. CTA - Consumer Technology Association; www.cta.tech.
68. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower
Institute); www.coolingtechnology.org.
69. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).
70. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014200 - 4
71. DHA - Decorative Hardwoods Association; (Formerly: Hardwood Plywood & Veneer
Association); www.decorativehardwoods.org.
72. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.
73. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA).
74. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA).
75. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org.
76. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
77. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.
78. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.
79. EOS/ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.
80. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).
81. ETL - Intertek (See Intertek); www.intertek.com.
82. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.
83. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org.
84. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation);
www.fiba.com.
85. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);
www.fivb.org.
86. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.
87. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.
88. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com.
89. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.
90. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.
91. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
92. GANA - Glass Association of North America; (See NGA).
93. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.
94. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.
95. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).
96. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
97. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; (See DHA).
98. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.
99. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.
100. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org.
101. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
102. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
103. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.
104. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.
105. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
106. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.
107. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
108. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North
America); www.ies.org.
109. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).
110. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
111. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.
112. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.org.
113. II - Infocomm International; (See AVIXA).
114. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.
115. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com.
116. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and
Automation Society); www.isa.org.
117. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014200 - 5
118. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface
Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.
119. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.
120. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).
121. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.
122. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.
123. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).
124. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.
125. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
126. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.
127. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.
128. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.
129. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.
130. MIA - Marble Institute of America; (See NSI).
131. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com.
132. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.
133. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;
www.mss- hq.org.
134. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org.
135. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);
www.nace.org.
136. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.
137. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.
138. NALP - National Association of Landscape Professionals; www.landscapeprofessionals.org.
139. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.
140. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org.
141. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.
142. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
143. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.
144. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.
145. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.
146. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.
147. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.
148. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.
149. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org.
150. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).
151. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.
152. NGA - National Glass Association (The); (Formerly: Glass Association of North America);
www.glass.org.
153. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.
154. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.
155. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).
156. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.
157. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.
158. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
159. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org.
160. NSI - National Stone Institute; (Formerly: Marble Institute of
America); www.naturalstoneinstitute.org.
161. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.
162. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.
163. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.
164. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.
165. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014200 - 6
166. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.
167. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association);
www.plasa.org.
168. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.
169. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.
170. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.
171. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org.
172. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.
173. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.
174. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.
175. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com.
176. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE).
177. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.
178. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.
179. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.
180. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org.
181. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.
182. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.
183. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.
184. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
185. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.
186. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.
187. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.
188. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.
189. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.
190. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.
191. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.
192. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com.
193. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.
194. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA -
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org.
195. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
196. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.
197. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.
198. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.
199. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.
200. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
201. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.
202. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.
203. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.
204. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.
205. WA - Wallcoverings Association; www.wallcoverings.org.
206. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.
207. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.
208. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.
209. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.
210. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org.
211. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.
212. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information
is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014200 - 7
1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.
2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;
www.iapmo.org.
3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.
2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.
3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;
www.nist.gov.
4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.
11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies
Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov.
12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.
14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research
Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org.
15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity
Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.
16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of
Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov.
18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org.
19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be
accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;
www.govinfo.gov.
2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from
DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).
4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).
5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services;
www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.
b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design
Guide; www.wbdg.org.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
014200 - 8
6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).
7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.
8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See
USAB).
E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This
information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and
Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.
2. CBSC - California Building Standards Code; California Code of Regulations; Title 24;
www.bsc.ca.gov.
a. CAC - California Administrative Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 1.
b. CBC - California Building Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.
c. CEC - California Electrical Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 3.
d. CMC - California Mechanical Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 4.
e. CPC - California Plumbing Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 5.
f. CEC - California Energy Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6.
g. CFC - California Fire Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 9.
h. CGBC - California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen), California Code of
Regulations, Title 24, Part 11.
i. CRSC - California Referenced Standards Code, California Code of Regulations, Title
24, Part 12.
3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).
4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org.
5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.
6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.
7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic
Development; www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 014200
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
015000 - 1
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
1.2 USE CHARGES
A. Installation, removal, and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract
Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary
services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces,
Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections,
staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details,
including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message
content.
C. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
D. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities
having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-
prevention program.
E. Moisture- and Mold-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting
materials and construction from water absorption and damage and mold. Describe delivery,
handling, storage, installation, and protection provisions for materials subject to water
absorption or water damage.
1. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating
water intrusion into completed Work, and requirements for replacing water-damaged
Work.
2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive
materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water
from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried
sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.
3. Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
015000 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric
service. Install service to comply with CEC and NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary
utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as
a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in CBC and the 2010 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and
foundations adequate for normal loading.
1. Secure Owner's approval for location of field offices prior to placement.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other
Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks,
and bookcases.
2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 12 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle
on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4 foot (1.2 m) square tack and
marker boards.
3. Drinking water and private toilet.
4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to
72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C).
5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations
and classes of fire exposures.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
015000 - 3
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide
vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space
thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type
heating units is prohibited.
2. Heating, Cooling, and Dehumidifying Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being
consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended location and application.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of not less than 8 at each
return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system
as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL
A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration
given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities
to minimize waste.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials
that are designated as Owner's property.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate
for construction.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
015000 - 4
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, safety shower and eyewash
facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of
fixtures and facilities.
E. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting
installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select
equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being
installed.
1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient
and substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application
of finishes and their proper curing or drying.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.
G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate
illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection
requirements without operating entire system.
H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use
by all construction personnel. Install not less than one land-based telephone line for each
field office.
I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide secure WiFi wireless connection to internet
with provisions for access by Architect and Owner.
J. Project Computer: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use
by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic
communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:
1. Processor: Intel Core i5 or i7.
2. Memory: 16 gigabyte.
3. Disk Storage: 1 terrabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive.
4. Display: 24 inch (610 mm) LCD monitor with 256 Mb dedicated video RAM.
5. Full-size keyboard and mouse.
6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet or Gigabit.
7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10 Professional.
8. Productivity Software:
a. Microsoft Office Professional, 2013 or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook.
b. Adobe Reader DC.
c. WinZip 10.0 or higher.
9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing,
photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three
functions.
10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router, and ISP, equipped with hardware
firewall, providing not less than 10.0 Mbps upload and 15 Mbps download speeds
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
015000 - 5
at each computer.
11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware,
phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.
12. Backup: External hard drive, not less than 2 terrabytes, with automated backup
software providing daily backups.
3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary field offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible
according to ASTM E136. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable
to Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved
areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within
construction limits indicated on Drawings.
1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment
as required to minimize dust.
C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
E. Storage and Staging: Use designated areas of Project site for storage and staging needs.
F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public
and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times.
H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
015000 - 6
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
J. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted unless otherwise indicated.
See Division 14 elevator Section for temporary use of new elevators.
K. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where
ladders are not adequate.
L. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be
permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of
Substantial Completion.
3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures,
utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those
indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of
existing facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to
access property for that purpose.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize
possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion
and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to
adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control
Drawings, requirements of EPA Construction General Permit, or authorities having
jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Comply with requirements specified in Section
311000 "Site Clearing."
1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by
construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant-protection zones.
2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and
sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.
4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by
runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the
drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect
tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction
and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and
control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
015000 - 7
at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved
by authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site
enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to
authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.
H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed
areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each
workday.
I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and
lighting.
J. Temporary Egress: Provide temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as
indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide signage directing
occupants to temporary egress.
K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete,
insulate temporary enclosures.
L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply
with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking
specified in other Sections.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and
similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish
procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post
warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a
warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to
be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Moisture and Mold Protection: Protect stored materials and installed Work in accordance
with Moisture and Mold Protection Plan.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
015000 - 8
B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are
subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Protect porous materials from water damage.
2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with
concrete.
4. Remove standing water from decks.
5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to
infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items
with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.
5. Do not install material that is wet.
6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but
prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges
specified for installed and stored materials.
3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity,
and exposure to water limits.
3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve
indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later
than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction
that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair
damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
015000 - 9
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of
Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used
during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
026000 - 1
SECTION 026000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use
in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published
product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project
or facility. Salvaged items or items reused from other projects are not considered new
products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content
materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through the
comparable product submittal process described in Part 2 "Comparable Products"
Article, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
4. Equal Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through the comparable
product submittal process described in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article, to have
the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,
physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those
of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make
or model number or other designation. Published attributes and characteristics of basis-of-
design product establish salient characteristics of products.
1. Evaluation of Comparable Products: In addition to the basis-of-design product
description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the
significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical
properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special
features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of
additional manufacturers.
C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with
requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
026000 - 2
Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event
that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other
requirements of the specifications, select another product or product from another
manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications; submit a
comparable product request or substitution request, if applicable.
D. Comparable Product Request Submittal: An action submittal requesting consideration of
a comparable product, including the following information:
1. Identification of basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be
replaced, including Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers
and titles.
2. Data indicating compliance with the requirements specified in Part 2 "Comparable
Products" Article.
E. Equal Product Request Submittal: An action submittal requesting consideration of a
comparable product, including the following information:
1. Identification of basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be
replaced, including Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers
and titles.
2. Data indicating compliance with the requirements specified in Part 2 "Comparable
Products" Article.
F. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: An action submittal complying with
requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
G. Substitution: Refer to Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for definition and
limitations on substitutions.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each
comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced.
Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Submittal Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A "Substitution Request - After the
Bidding/Negotiating Stage" or Contractor's comparable form.
2. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in Part 2
"Comparable Products" Article.
3. Architect's Action on Comparable Product Submittal: If necessary, Architect will
request additional information or documentation for evaluation, as specified in
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
a. Form of Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
comparable product request within time allocated.
B. Equal Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable
product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include
Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Submittal Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A "Substitution Request - After the
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
026000 - 3
Bidding/Negotiating Stage" or Contractor's comparable form.
2. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in Part 2
"Comparable Products" Article.
3. Architect's Action on Equal Product Submittal: If necessary, Architect will request
additional information or documentation for evaluation, as specified in Section
013300 "Submittal Procedures."
a. Form of Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of an equal
product request within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected,
even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products, using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations
on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written standard warranty form furnished by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and issued in the name of the Owner or
endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner and issued in the name of the Owner or endorsed by
manufacturer to Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included in the Project Manual, prepare a
written document, using indicated form properly executed.
3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
026000 - 4
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other
items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard
options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced
and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the
Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal,"
"or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in Part 2
"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish
equivalency of proposed products. Unless otherwise indicated, evaluation
of "or equal" product status is by the Architect, whose determination is final.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product,
provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products
or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide the following."
2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or
source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered.
a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by the following."
3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered.
a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide one of the following."
4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed or an
unnamed product that complies with requirements.
a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance
with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following."
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
026000 - 5
b. Provision of an unnamed product is not considered a substitution, if the
product complies with requirements.
c. Comply with requirements in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers'
names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered.
a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following."
6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available
manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or a product by
an unnamed manufacturer that complies with requirements.
a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase "Subject to
compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following."
b. Provision of products by an unnamed manufacturer is not considered a
substitution, if the product complies with requirements.
c. Comply with requirements in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of a product by an unnamed manufacturer.
7. Basis-of-Design Product:
a. Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on
Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named
manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications may additionally indicate sizes,
profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product
named.
1) Comply with requirements in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product by one of the named
manufacturers.
2) For approval of a product by an unnamed manufacturer, comply with
requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for
substitutions for convenience.
b. Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on
Drawings, and do not include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by an unnamed manufacturer.
Drawings and Specifications may additionally indicate sizes, profiles,
dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
1) For approval of a product by an unnamed manufacturer, comply with
requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for
substitutions for convenience.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require the phrase "match Architect's
sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
026000 - 6
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies
with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider
Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied.
If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action,
except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Show compliance with
requirements for comparable products including, but not limited to, the following, as
applicable:
1. Comparable product submittal is fully documented and properly submitted.
2. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated
results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work, and has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work.
a. Provide coordination information, including, but not limited to, a list of
changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to
construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be
necessary to accommodate proposed comparable product.
3. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those of the
product named in the Specifications or on the Drawings. Significant product
qualities include attributes, such as type, function, in-service performance and
physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics,
sustainable design characteristics, warranty, and other specific features and
requirements. Provide the following:
a. Annotated copy of applicable specification section.
b. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
c. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
d. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if
requested.
e. Samples, if requested.
4. Product Data: Including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication
and installation procedures.
5. Certificates and qualification data.
6. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting
test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
7. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC-ES or another model code organization acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
8. Evidence that the proposed comparable product has received necessary
approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Evidence that the use of proposed comparable product will not adversely affect
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
026000 - 7
Contractor's construction schedule.
a. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
comparable product with products specified for the Work, including effect
on the overall Contract Time.
b. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the
Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or
delays in delivery.
10. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
11. Contractor's certification that proposed comparable product complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents, is compatible with related materials, and
is appropriate for applications indicated.
12. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed comparable product to produce
indicated results.
13. If use of proposed comparable product involves more than one contractor, evidence
that use of proposed comparable product has been coordinated with other portions
of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Submittal Requirements, Two-Step Process: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's
request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal
requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 026000
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017300 - 1
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution
of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner's portion of the Work.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection and repair of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for coordination of Owner's separate contracts, and limits
on use of Project site.
2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
subsequent work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of subsequent work.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certified Surveys: Submit five copies signed by land surveyor.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor, certifying that location and elevation
of improvements comply with requirements.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey
data.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017300 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-
surveying services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching
of construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, or when
encountering the need for cutting and patching of elements whose structural function
is not known, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions
from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements
during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner
that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related
components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended
or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results
in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a
manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of specified products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices
and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design
requirements.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in-place materials. Use materials that are not considered hazardous.
C. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017300 - 3
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations
maximum allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and
electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas service piping, and water-service piping;
underground electrical services; and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations
of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems
are to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1. Description of the Work, including Specification Section number and paragraph, and
Drawing sheet number and detail, where applicable.
2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
4. Recommended corrections.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to
fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements
before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017300 - 4
delaying the Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the
need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information or
interpretation to Architect in accordance with requirements in Section 013100 "Project
Management and Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks and existing
conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. Engage a land surveyor experienced in laying out the Work, using the following accepted surveying
practices:
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard
established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading,
fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,
building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for
mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with
control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines
and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions,
name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used.
Make the log available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar
reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks
and control points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior
written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or
control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017300 - 5
control points to Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly.
Base replacements on the original survey control points.
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain not less than two permanent benchmarks on Project
site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions,
locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing
significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by
land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately
positioned as shown on the survey.
1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade
contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or
with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb, and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for
maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain headroom clearance of not less than 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied
spaces and not less than 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces, unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products
in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure satisfactory results as judged
by Architect. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial
Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations, so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations
or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy of type expected
for Project.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017300 - 6
construction items on-site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive
noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for Work specified to
be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work
to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply
with indicated requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of
adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately
located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments
are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions with manufacturer.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components
at heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed Work are not
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect, as judged by Architect. Fit exposed
connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.
1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and
replacing defective Work.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting
and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and
similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements
retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original
Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017300 - 7
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering
and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core
drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by
cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.
Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture
or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following
performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable, as judged by
Architect. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where
applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat
over entire unbroken surface containing the patch, corner to corner of wall and edge to
edge of ceiling. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar,
oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 COORDINATION OF OWNER'S PORTION OF THE WORK
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel and Owner's separate
contractors.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's
construction personnel and Owner's separate contractors.
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017300 - 8
portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify
Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.
3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements
strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or
three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other
waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to
regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where Work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary
for proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum
the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning
materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and
that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom
from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste
materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in
Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection
from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017300 - 9
3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with
requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements."
3.10 PROTECTION AND REPAIR OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair Work previously completed and subsequently damaged during construction period.
Repair to like-new condition.
C. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain
undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of
the Work.
D. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 017300
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017419 - 1
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials resulting from demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal of demolition or construction waste and subsequent salvage, sale, recycling, or deposit
in landfill, incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or designated spoil areas on Owner’s
property.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the
Work.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Waste Management Conference(s): Conduct conference(s) at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
1. Use CGBC form "Construction Waste Management (CWM) Plan" or Contractor's comparable
form.
B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
report. Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes).
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017419 - 2
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes).
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
8. Use CGBC form "Construction Waste Management (CWM) Worksheet" or Contractor's
comparable form.
C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated
end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste
generated by the Work.
D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
F. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable
waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
G. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, or individual employed and
assigned by General Contractor, with a record of successful waste management coordination
of projects with similar requirements.
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Universal certified by EPA-approved certification program.
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to requirements in this Section. Plan
shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis.
Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or
volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing, and
construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for
estimates.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each
type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation
procedures.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017419 - 3
1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this
Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into
the Work.
2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals
and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of
recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone
numbers.
5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for
separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and
designated location where materials separation will be performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total
nonhazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Facilitate recycling and salvage of
materials.
2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with transportation and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with applicable provisions in California Integrated Waste Management Act of 1989
(AB 939).
C. Comply with applicable provisions in California Code of Regulations Title 14, Section 18700
et seq.
D. Comply with applicable provisions in "California Green Building Standards Code", California
Code of Regulations Title 24, Part 11, Section 5.408.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers,
storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste
management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be
responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work
plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project.
C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017419 - 4
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site.
Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and
disposal.
D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied
and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating
materials that are to be salvaged and recycled.
2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling
dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label
indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials
and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make items functional for use indicated.
B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.
C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label
indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives
received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to
recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives,
solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process.
D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical
according to approved construction waste management plan.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017419 - 5
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste
until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable
materials at each container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated
materials if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver
or processor as often as required to prevent overfilling bins.
3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.
B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other
metals.
1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) size.
C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with
other metals.
1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) size.
2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
D. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate
lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.
E. Metals: Separate metals by type.
1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
F. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.
G. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a
dry location.
H. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members, including trim and other metals from
acoustical panels and tile, and sort with other metals.
I. Carpet: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips.
1. Store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by carpet
reclamation agency or carpet recycler.
J. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017419 - 6
1. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer
provided by carpet reclamation agency or carpet recycler.
K. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by material and size. Separate
supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by material and size.
L. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by material and size.
M. Lamps: Separate lamps by type and store according to requirements in 40 CFR 273.
3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component
wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile
chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
D. Paint: Seal containers and store by type.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged or recycled, remove waste
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed
of accumulate on- site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and
areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
3.7 ATTACHMENTS
A. Appendix A - Sample form "Construction Waste Management (CWM) Plan."
B. Appendix B - Sample form "Construction Waste Management (CWM) Worksheet."
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017419 - 7
END OF SECTION 017419
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017700 - 1
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final Completion procedures.
3. List of incomplete items (punch list).
4. Submittal of Project warranties.
5. Final cleaning.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements to train the Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products, equipment, and
systems.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C. Field Report: For pest-control inspection.
1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed
and corrected (Contractor's "punch list"), indicating the value of each item on the list and
reasons why the Work is incomplete.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017700 - 2
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following not less
than 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities
having jurisdiction, permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating
certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections,
including Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance
manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar
final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including
specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service
agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections,
including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and
deliver to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's
name and model number.
5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records.
6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted.
7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use,
operation, and maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following not less
than 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to
Substantial Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance
of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and
training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration
and Training."
6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services.
7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with
local emergency responders.
8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with
mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning requirements.
10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed
finishes to eliminate visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial
Completion not less than 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and
ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either
proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017700 - 3
1.5 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for
determining Final Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment in accordance with Section 012900
"Payment Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's
Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or
corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of
the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved
for acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance
coverage complying with insurance requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance
not less than 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final
inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with
inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a
final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of
construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.6 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing
correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside
the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A, "Punch List", or Contractor's
comparable form.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, listed by room or space
number, starting with exterior areas first, and proceeding from lowest
floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including
categories for ceilings, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building
systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items (punch list) in the following format:
a. MS Excel Electronic File: Architect will return annotated file.
b. Five paper copies.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017700 - 4
1.7 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for
designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence
on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal
of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of
contents of Project Manual.
C. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format.
Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single
electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide
bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Owner.
D. Warranties in Paper Form:
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered,
loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents,
and sized to receive 8-1/2 by 11 inch (215 by 280 mm) paper.
E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by
manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning
agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might
damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-
37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code
of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to
comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental
and antipollution regulations.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017700 - 5
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final
cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average
commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting
inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project
or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign
substances.
b. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a
dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign
substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior
surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
c. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces,
including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults,
manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
d. Clean flooring, removing debris, dirt, and staining; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations.
e. Vacuum and mop concrete.
f. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and
excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations
if visible soil or stains remain.
g. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors
and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,
vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care
not to scratch surfaces.
h. Remove labels that are not permanent.
i. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment,
and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar
droppings, and other foreign substances.
j. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
k. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
l. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on
inspection.
1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA ACR.
m. Clean luminaires, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
n. Clean strainers.
o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary
Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.
D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste-disposal requirements in Section
017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017700 - 6
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations required by Section 017300 "Execution"
before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing
defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and
properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be
repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used
during construction to specified condition.
END OF SECTION 017700
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017823 - 1
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Systems and equipment operation manuals.
4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
5. Product maintenance manuals.
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual
as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time
of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as
required by this Section.
1. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of
operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to
revisions and field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. Initial Manual Submittal:
a. Submit draft copy by email to Architect and Commissioning Authority.
Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals.
2. Final Manual Submittal:
a. Submit draft copy by email to Architect and Commissioning Authority.
Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals.
b. Submit corrected copy on digital media acceptable to Owner.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual not less than 30 days before
commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will
comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual in final form prior to requesting
inspection for Substantial Completion and not less than 15 days before commencing
demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with
comments.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017823 - 2
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's
comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and
Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.
E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
1.3 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file
for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name
document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual
directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into
individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting
bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file
tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section
for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Architect.
7. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the
content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
D. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify
each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract
Documents. If no
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017823 - 3
designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation
of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
1.5 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating
procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types
of emergencies indicated.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and
component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error
messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating
personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
1.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS
A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating
operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine
and special operating procedures.
B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017823 - 4
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
C. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for
identification.
1.7 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data
indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a
system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance
procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare
parts, and warranty information.
B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,
include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,
maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each
component part or piece of equipment:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017823 - 5
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to
product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or
component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract
Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to
information not applicable.
a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not
available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and
maintenance of equipment or systems.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including
disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and
local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances
and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
H. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control
sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in
record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.8 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating
care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials
and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
017823 - 6
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related
services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 017823
017839 - 1
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.
2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
1.2
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal:
1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.
2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
b. Final Submittal:
1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned Record Prints and one set of file
prints.
2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information
were recorded.
B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications,
including addenda and Contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance
manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
2. Include Record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of Record Product Data.
017839 - 2
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Drawings: Maintain one set of paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued, for
Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and revisions to record drawings as
they occur; do not wait until end of Project.
1. Preparation: Mark record drawings to show the actual installation, where
installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who
obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or
similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up
record drawings.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would
be difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record drawings to corresponding photographic documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up
record drawings.
4. Mark record drawings with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to
distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same
location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or
omitted from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
017839 - 3
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of Project Manual, incorporating new and
revised Specifications as modifications are issued, for Project Record Document
purposes. Post changes and revisions to record specifications as they occur; do not wait
until end of Project.
1. Preparation: Mark record specifications to indicate the actual product installation,
where installation varies from that indicated in specifications, addenda, and
Contract modifications.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and
installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
b. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products,
materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product
options selected.
c. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information
necessary to provide a record of selections made.
d. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been
submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as
Record Product Data.
e. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings
where applicable.
1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each submittal for Project Record Document
purposes. Post changes and revisions to record product data as they occur; do not wait until
end of Project.
1. Preparation: Mark record product data to indicate the actual product installation
where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and
installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
b. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and
changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
c. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings
where applicable.
1.6 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store Record Documents in the field office apart from
the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Record Documents for
construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry,
legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Record
Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 017839
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
024119 - 1
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and
their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner
that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control,
and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
C. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity.
D. Predemolition photographs.
E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory of items that have been removed and salvaged.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
024119 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as
practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before
proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials:
1. See Hazardous Material Report Section 022600.
2. Lead Based paint to be abated in areas of construction per California Code of
Regulations Title 8 Section 1532.1.Lead.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved
contractors so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
2.2
A.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective
demolition.
B. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
024119 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective
demolition operations.
B. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving
areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that
maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed
and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with
same or compatible piping material and leave in place.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services
and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall,
reconnect, and make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed
and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or
compatible ductwork material and leave in place.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
024119 - 4
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to
prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports
as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of
construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement
or collapse of construction being demolished.
C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations
of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-
suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Maintain fire watch during and for not less than two hours after flame-cutting operations.
5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous
materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
024119 - 5
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.6
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them
according to Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.7
CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
072100 - 1
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass-fiber blanket.
2. Mineral-wool blanket.
3. Mineral-wool board.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of
product.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
2.2
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All insulation provided for use on this project shall be identified as required by Section 12-13-
1557 of the California Referenced Standards Code (Part 12, Title 24, C.C.R.); Chapter 12-13
"Standards For Insulating Material", (See Part 6, Title 24, C.C.R.); Department Of Consumer
Affairs, Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; Article 3: "Standards for Insulating
Material".
2.3
SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
2.4
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET
A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E84; passing ASTM E136 for
combustion characteristics.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
072100 - 2
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Provide unless otherwise indicated.
3. R-values as indicated on Drawings.
B. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Reinforced-Foil Faced: ASTM C665, Type III (reflective
faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category
1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil- scrim kraft, or foil-scrim
polyethylene.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Provide where indicated on Drawings.
3. R-values as indicated on Drawings.
2.5 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS
A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E84; passing ASTM E136 for
combustion characteristics.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
b. Rockwool International.
c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
2. Provide where required for fire-resistance rated assemblies.
3. R-values as indicated on Drawings.
B. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Reinforced-Foil Faced: ASTM C665, Type III (reflective
faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM
E84); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim
kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
072100 - 3
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
2. Provide where indicated on Drawings and where required for fire-resistance rated
assemblies.
3. R-values as indicated on Drawings.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke- developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, closed cell, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively,
per ASTM E84.
B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to
ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,
widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise
shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide
lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction
fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3 inch (76 mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting
fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438
mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
072100 - 4
taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder
facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight
installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed as indicated on Drawings.
b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed as indicated on Drawings.
6. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber
requirements of assembly. Provide mineral-fiber insulation to comply with
requirements of perimeter fire-containment system.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces
where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal
maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40
kg/cu. m).
2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION 072100
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
072500 - 1
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Flexible flashing.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of
product.
1.3
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Evaluation reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 FLEXIBLE FLASHING
A. General: Contractor may use either butyl rubber flashing or rubberized-asphalt flashing at his
option.
B. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded
polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.8 mm).
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. DuPont Safety & Construction.
b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
c. Protecto Wrap Company.
d. Raven Industries, Inc.
e. TYPAR.
2. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to
NFPA 285.
C. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a
pliable, rubberized- asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.8
mm).
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
072500 - 2
a. Advanced Building Products Inc.
b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
c. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.
d. Fortifiber Building Systems Group.
e. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
f. MFM Building Products Corp.
g. Polyguard Products, Inc.
h. TYPAR.
i. Wire-Bond.
2. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to
NFPA 285.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials not less than 4 inches (100 mm) except
that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
END OF SECTION 072500
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 075400 – ROOFING MEMBRANE (TPO)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Single-Ply Roofing Membrane
2. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Flashings
3. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Accessories
4. Roof Insulation
B. Related Sections
1. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
2. Section 07620: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
3. Section 15430: Plumbing Specialties
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Annual Book of ASTM Standards
1. ASTM D-751 – Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics
2. ASTM D-2137 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property—Brittleness Point of Flexible
Polymers and Coated Fabrics
3. ASTM E-96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
4. ASTM D1204 - Standard Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Non Rigid
Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature
5. ASTM D-471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Effect of Liquids
6. ASTM D-1149 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration—Cracking in an Ozone
Controlled Environment
7. ASTM C-1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient
Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer
8. ASTM C-1371 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room
Temperature Using Portable Emissometers
9. ASTM E 903 – Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmission of
Materials Using Integrating Spheres
B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual
C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)
D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
E. U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC)
1. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED)
F. Factory Mutual (FM Global) - Approval Guide
G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - Roofing Systems and Materials Guide (TGFU R1306)
H. California Title 24 Energy Efficient Standards
07540-1
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
I. ENERGY STAR
J. Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC)
K. Miami Dade County
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and the glossary of the National Roofing Contractors
Association (NRCA) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual for definitions of roofing terms related to this
section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product data sheets for each type of product indicated in this section.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturers standard details and approved shop drawings for the roof
system specified.
C. Samples: Provide samples of insulations, fasteners, membrane materials and accessories for
verification of quality.
D. Certificates: Installer shall provide written documentation from the manufacturer of their authorization
to install the roof system, and eligibility to obtain the warranty specified in this section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: GAF® shall provide a roofing system that meets or exceeds all criteria
listed in this section.
B. Installer’s Qualifications:
1. Installer shall be classified as a Master or Master Select contractor as defined and certified
by GAF®.
2. Installer shall be classified as a Master Select contractor as defined and certified by GAF®.
3. Installer shall be classified as a Master contractor as defined and certified by GAF®.
4. Installer shall be classified as a Certified Maintenance Professional as defined and certified by
GAF®.
C. Source Limitations: All components listed in this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer
or approved by the primary roofing manufacturer.
D. Final Inspection Manufacturer’s representative shall provide a comprehensive final inspection
after completion of the roof system. All application errors must be addressed and final punch list
completed.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For a start-up and/or an interim inspection contact a Field Service Representative of GAF.
B. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection will be conducted by a Field Service
Representative of GAF to ascertain the roofing system has been installed according to GAF’s
specifications and details.
07540-2
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
C. Regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA), the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA), and other standards must also be
followed.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Prior to scheduled commencement of the roofing installation and associated work, conduct a
meeting at the project site with the installer, architect, owner, GAF® representative and any other
persons directly involved with the performance of the work. The installer shall record conference
discussions to include decisions and agreements reached (or disagreements), and furnish copies of
recorded discussions to each attending party. The main purpose of this meeting is to review
foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work.
1.08 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide an installed roofing membrane and base flashing system that does not permit the passage of
water, and will withstand the design pressures calculated in accordance with the most current
revision of ASCE 7.
B. Provide an installed roofing membrane and base flashing system that does not permit the passage of
water, and will withstand the design pressures determined in FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet
1-28, to meet a 1-60 or greater wind uplift rating as required by location.
C. GAF® shall provide all primary roofing materials that are physically and chemically compatible when
installed in accordance with manufacturers current application requirements.
1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All work shall be performed in a safe, professional manner, conforming to all federal, state and local
codes.
B. Exterior Fire Test Exposure: Provide a roofing system achieving a UL Class A Rating for roof slopes
indicated.
C. Windstorm Classification: Provide a roofing system which will achieve a Factory Mutual 1-60 1-75 1-
90 1-120 wind uplift rating, as listed in the current FM Approval Guide.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all roofing materials to the site in original containers, with factory seals intact. All products
are to carry a GAF® label.
B. Store all pail goods in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry location within their
specified temperature range. Reference data sheets for product storage requirements.
C. Do not expose materials to moisture in any form before, during or after delivery to the site. Reject
delivery of materials that show evidence of contact with moisture.
D. Use “breathable” type covers such as canvas tarpaulins to allow venting and protection from weather
and moisture. Cover and protect materials at the end of each work day. Do not remove any
protective tarpaulins until immediately before the material will be installed.
07540-3
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather
1. Proceed with roofing only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit.
2. Ambient temperatures must be above 45°F (7.2°C) when applying hot asphalt or water based
adhesives.
1.12 JOB CONDITIONS
A. All steel beams, columns, and large pipes that project through the insulation should be vapor-sealed
and insulated with a 4-foot high wrap of insulation. The height of insulation at conduits, small pipes,
and rods should be four times the regular wall insulation thickness. In both cases, the thickness of
insulation on the projection should be half that on the regular wall or ceiling.
B. Temperature Pulldown
1. The first stage of temperature reduction should be from ambient down to 35° F at whatever rate
of reduction the refrigeration system can achieve.
2. The room should then be held at that temperature until it is dry. Finishes are especially subject
to damage when temperatures are lowered too rapidly. Portland cement plaster should be fully
cured before the room is refrigerated.
3. If there is a possibility that the room is airtight (most likely for small rooms, 20 feet by 20 feet
maximum), swinging doors should be partially open during pulldown to relieve the internal
vacuum caused by the cooling of the air, or vents should be provided. Permanent air relief
vents are needed for continual operation of defrosts in small rooms with only swinging doors.
Both conditions of possible air heating during defrost and cooling should be considered in
design of air vents and reliefs.
4. The concrete slab will contract during pulldown, causing slab/wall joints, contraction joints, and
other construction joints to open. At the end of the holding period (i.e., at 35° F), any necessary
caulking should be done.
5. An average time for achieving dryness is 72 hours. However, there are indicators that may be
used, such as watching the rate of frost formation on the coils or measuring the rate of moisture
removal by capturing the condensation during defrost.
1.13 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE Provide manufacturers standard WeatherStopper®
Diamond Pledge™ Guarantee
1. Single source coverage and no monetary limitation where the manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components in the roofing system, which cause a leak due to a failure in materials or
workmanship.
a) Duration: Twenty (20) years from the date of completion.
b) WELL ROOF™ Extension. GAF® also guarantees to the original or first subsequent
owner coverage extension by 25% of the original guarantee length, provided that the roof in
inspected and maintained in accordance with the MAINTAINENCE section of this
specification.
B. Provide manufacturers standard WeatherStopper® System Pledge Guarantee
1. Single source coverage and a monetary limitation of one (1) dollar per square foot where the
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components in the roof system, which cause a leak
due to failure in materials or workmanship.
a) Duration: Twenty (20) years from the date of completion.
07540-4
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
*Materials and workmanship of listed products within this section when installed in
accordance with current GAF® application and specification requirements. Contact GAF®
Contractor Services for the full terms and conditions of the guarantee.
C. Provide manufacturers standard WeatherStopper® Integrated Roofing System Guarantee
1. The manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the portion of the roofing materials, which have
resulted in a leak due to a manufacturing defect or defects caused by ordinary wear and tear.
a) Duration: Twenty (20) years from the date of completion.
D. Provide manufacturers Vapor Seal Addendum to the Diamond Pledge NDL Roof Guarantee
1. The manufacturer agrees to repair or replace roof to wall junctures of the roofing system that has
been compromised due to a manufacturing defect or misapplication of the GAF Vapor Barrier
Product.
a) Duration: Five (5) years from the date of warranty issuance
*This Guarantee does NOT cover conditions other than leaks, except to the extent of condensation or
moisture intrusion issues due to a manufacturing defect or misapplication of the GAF Vapor Barrier
Products installed on the roof. Contact GAF® Technical Support Services for the full terms and conditions.
E. Provide manufacturers standard prorated material warranty
1. The manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the portion of the roofing materials that have
resulted in a leak due to a manufacturing defect or defects caused by ordinary wear and tear.
a) Duration: 2 years
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. GAF® - 1 Campus Drive, Parsippany, NJ 07054
2.02 AIR AND VAPOR RETARDER SYSTEM
A. Proprietary formulated elastomeric styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) polymer modified bitumen in
combination with a high tack self-adhesive, GAF SA Vapor Retarder by GAF.
2.03 INSULATION
1. EnergyGuard™ Tapered Polyiso Insulation by GAF®,
a) Board Thickness: tapered
b) Thermal Resistance (LTTR value) of:
c) Compressive Strength: 20 PSI, meets ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2*.
2.04 ROOF COVER BOARD/RECOVER BOARD
A. High-density polyisocyanurate cover board, with a coated glass facers on both major surfaces of the
core foam meets ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 4, Grade 2.
1. EnergyGuard™ HD Polyiso Insulation by GAF®,
a) Board Thickness: ½” or 12.7mm
b) Minimum Compressive Strength: 80psi (551kPa)
c) Thermal Resistance (LTTR value) of: >2.5
d) Recycle Content: Max 8%
07540-5
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
2.05 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. A smooth type, polyester scrim reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin membrane, for use as a single ply
roofing membrane. Meets or exceeds the minimum requirements of ASTM D-6878. UL Listed, FM
Approved, Dade County Product Approval, Florida Building Code Approved.
1. EverGuard® Extreme TPO; EverGuard® Extreme TPO Fleece-Back Membrane
a) Thickness: 60mil
b) Half sheet size:
i) 5’ x 100’, 500 sq.ft.
c) Color:
i) White - Energy Star Listed, CRRC Listed and Title 24 Compliant.
2.06 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Advanced heat and UV protected, smooth type, polyester scrim reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin
membrane, for use as a single ply roofing membrane. Meets or exceeds the minimum requirements
of ASTM D-6878. UL Listed, FM Approved, Dade County Product Approval, Florida Building Code
Approved.
1. EverGuard® Extreme TPO; EverGuard® Extreme TPO Fleece-Back Membrane
a) Thickness: 60mil
b) Half sheet size:
i) 5’ x 100’, 500 sq.ft.
c) Color:
i) White - Energy Star Listed, CRRC Listed and Title 24 Compliant.
2.07 ADHESIVES, SEALANTS and PRIMERS
A. Low VOC solvent-based bonding adhesive for use with smooth TPO membranes, EverGuard® Low
VOC Bonding Adhesive, by GAF®.
B. Low VOC solvent based primer for preparing surfaces to receive butyl based adhesive tapes,
EverGuard® TPO Low VOC Primer, by GAF®.
C. Solvent based seam cleaner used to clean exposed or contaminated seam prior to heat welding,
EverGuard® TPO Seam Cleaner, by GAF®.
D. Solvent based, trowel grade synthetic elastomeric sealant. Durable and UV resistant suitable for use
where caulk is typically used. Available in 10 oz. tubes, FlexSeal™ Caulk Grade Sealant by GAF®.
E. Commercial grade roofing sealant suitable for sealing the upper lip of exposed termination bars and
penetrations and around clamping rings and comes with a 20 yr. ltd warranty against leaks caused
by manufacturing defects. Meets the performance criteria of ASTM D412, ASTM D2196, ASTM
D1475 and ASTM D1644, FlexSeal™ Roof Sealant, by GAF®.
F. Insulation Adhesive: Oly-Bond 500™ distributed by GAF®.
2.08 PLATES & FASTENERS
A. Drill•Tec™ Standard Screws: Standard duty alloy steel insulation fastener with CR-10 coating with
a .215” diameter thread. Factory Mutual Standard 4470 Approved, #3 Phillips head for use on steel
and wood decks.
07540-6
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
2.09 ACCESSORIES
A. GENERAL FLASHING ACCESSORIES
1. A smooth type, unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin based membrane for use as an
alternative flashing/reinforcing material for penetrations and corners. Required whenever
preformed vent boots cannot be used, available in White, 0.055 inches (55 mils) nominal
thickness and sheet size: 24in x 50ft. EverGuard Extreme® TPO Detailing Membrane, by
GAF®.
2. An 8 inch (203 mm) wide smooth type, polyester scrim reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin
membrane strip for use as a cover strip over coated metal and stripping-in coated metal
flanges and general repairs: 0.045 inches (45 mils) nominal thickness with 100 foot length,
available in White, EverGuard Extreme® TPO Flashing Membrane, by GAF®.
B. PENETRATION ACCESSORIES
1. .070 thick molded penetration pocket to provide structure and foundation for the application of
a pourable sealant for a variety of roof penetrations, weldable and 9" x 6" x 4" (l x w x h).
EverGuard Extreme® TPO Pourable Sealer Pocket
2. 055” thick smooth type, unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin membrane designed for use as
a conforming membrane seal over T-joints in 60 and 80 mil membrane applications.
EverGuard® TPO Drain by GAF®
C. FIELD OF ROOF ACCESSORIES
1. .055” thick smooth type, unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin membrane designed for use as
a conforming membrane seal over T-joints in 60, 70 and 80 mil membrane applications.
EverGuard Extreme® T-Joint Patches, by GAF®.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that the surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that the deck is supported and secured.
C. Verify that the deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly
sloped to drains, valleys, eaves, scuppers or gutters.
D. Verify that the deck surfaces are dry and free of ice or snow.
E. Verify that all roof openings or penetrations through the roof are solidly set, and that all flashings are
tapered.
3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. Plywood Deck
07540-7
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
1. Plywood sheathing must be exterior grade, minimum 4 ply, and not less than 3/4” (19 mm)
19/32” (Miami Dade County) thick.
2. Preservatives or fire retardants used to treat the decking must be compatible with roofing
materials.
3. The deck must be installed over joists that are spaced 24” (610 mm) o.c. or less.
4. The deck must be installed so that all four sides of each panel bear on and are secured to joist
and cross blocking. The panels must be secured in accordance with APA–The Engineered
Wood Association recommendations “H” clips are not acceptable.
5. Panels must be installed with a 1/8” to 1/4” (3mm – 6mm) gap between panels and must match
vertically at joints to within 1/8” (3mm).
6. Decking should be kept dry and roofed promptly after installation.
7. Deck shall be attached with approved fasteners at required spacing. Consult local building
codes for specific requirements
B. Oriented Strand Board (OSB) Deck
1. Oriented Strand Board must carry a Structural 1 rating if it is to be used as a decking
material.
2. Preservatives or fire retardants used to treat decking must be compatible with roofing
materials.
3. The deck must be installed over joists that are spaced 24” (610 mm) o.c. or less.
4. The deck must be installed so that all four sides of each panel bear on and are secured to
joist and cross blocking; the APA/Engineered Wood Association (APA) recommendations. “H”
clips are not acceptable.
5. Panels must be installed with a 1/8” to 1/4” (3mm – 6mm) gap between panels and must
match vertically at joints to within (1/8” (3mm).
6. Decking should be kept dry and roofed promptly after installation.
7. LWIC should not be poured during rainy periods. Deck areas that have frozen before they
have cured must be removed and replaced. Decks which receive precipitation prior to
installation of the roof membrane must be checked for moisture content and dryness.
8. Where the mean January temperature (Reference current ASHRAE Fundamentals
Handbook) is below 40oF (4.4oC), lightweight insulating concrete decks must be poured and
roofed between April 1st and October 31st. This type of deck is unacceptable in Alaska.
9. Cellular lightweight insulating concrete decks can be installed over non-slotted, galvanized
metal decking designed for cellular lightweight insulating concrete or structural concrete.
3.02 NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Acceptable Material
1. Solid Blocking: Non-pressure treated wood as required, #2 Grade or better, nominal 1 1 /4"
(30 mm) x 4" (102 mm) with a minimum thickness of 3 1 /2" (88 mm).
2. Shim Material: Plywood, 1 /2" (13 mm) x width to match solid blocking.
3. Verify the condition of existing roof nailers and anchor to resist 250 lb. per ft. (550 kg) load
applied in any direction. New nailers should meet same load requirements.
4. DRILL-TEC™ HD screws 18" (457 mm) o.c. attachment to structural wood, steel decks with a
1" (25 mm) thread embedment.
5. DRILL-TEC™ spikes or HD screws 18" (457 mm) o.c. attachment to concrete decks. Min. 1"
(25 mm) shank or thread penetration.
6. Wood nailers attached to gypsum, concrete, cellular concrete and cementitious wood fiber
must be fastened 12" (305 mm) o.c., through the nailer into the substrate with substrate
approved DRILL-TEC™ fasteners.
7. Three anchors per length of wood nailer minimum.
07540-8
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install GAF®’s EverGuard® TPO roofing system according to all current application requirements in
addition to those listed in this section.
B. GAF® EverGuard® TPO Specification #:
C. Start the application of membrane plies at the low point of the roof or at the drains, so that the flow of
water is over or parallel to, but never against the laps.
3.03 AIR/VAPOR BARRIER
A. GENERAL
1. Air/vapor retarder components must typically be installed when required by design
professional to address internal building air pressure or humidity conditions on the structural
deck or directly over a minimal layer of EnergyGuard™ insulation or fire barrier.
2. EnergyGuard™ insulation must be installed over the vapor retarder to raise the location of
the dew point temperature above the level of the vapor retarder.
3. Designers should consider requiring air retarders:
a) On all air porous decks, with openings in the walls or area directly below the roof deck
that exceeds 10% of the total wall area.
b) When the internal pressurization of the building is in excess of 5 lbs. per sq. ft. (239 Pa).
c) When the building height exceeds 50 ft. (30.5 m).
d) When buildings have large openings or overhangs.
e) In conditions where positive internal pressure is applied suddenly, as may be the case at
aircraft hangers or distribution centers—otherwise, the roofing system may fail due to
pressure impact.
4. Refer to FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-28 and 1-29 for specific installation
procedures for all roofs with large openings.
5. For roofs to be guaranteed by GAF:
a) Air retarders are required for all extended-length guarantees on buildings where large
wall openings greater than 10% of the total wall area can be open during a windstorm,
including opening due to storm damage.
B. APPLICATION – LOOSE-APPLIED
1. Install air/vapor barrier sheet loose-applied to the deck or fire board so that wrinkles and buckles
are not formed.
2. Overlap air/vapor barrier sheets a minimum of 6" for side and end laps. Tape laps together with
duct tape or double sided tape.
3. Seal perimeter and penetration areas with foam sealant.
4. Seal all perimeter nailers with adhered roof membrane placed over the nailer and covering the
exterior face of the nailer by 1" (25 mm).
5. Install insulation boards over the air/vapor retarder and mechanically attach the boards to the
deck.
C. APPLICATION – ADHERED
1. Apply compatible adhesive to the structural deck or fire barrier board per air vapor retarder
manufacturers’ recommendations.
2. Install the air/vapor retarder components loose applied to the deck or fire barrier board so that
wrinkles and buckles are not formed. Broom air/vapor barrier components to ensure embedment
into the adhesive.
07540-9
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
3. Overlap air/vapor retarder components a minimum of 6" (152 mm) for side and end laps. Adhere
laps together with compatible adhesive.
4. Seal perimeter and penetration areas with foam sealant.
5. Install insulation boards over the air/vapor barrier and mechanically attach the boards to the
deck or adhere the boards to the air/vapor retarder with compatible adhesive to achieve the
desired roof system uplift resistance.
D. APPLICATION
1. In cold storage and freezer facilities the moisture drive is generally downward where the
roofing membrane serves as a vapor barrier.
2. In new construction, when working in colder temperatures, curing of concrete floors and the
use of propane heaters to accelerate dehydration will cause construction-generated moisture
to be driven upward into the roofing assembly due to the lack of ventilation. In this case, the
use of a vapor retarder/barrier beneath the roofing insulation is strongly recommended to
reduce the potential for condensation and the possible phenomenon of frozen blocks of
insulation that may occur during temperature pull down.
3. If a vapor retarder is specified to safeguard against construction generated moisture, GAF Air
and Vapor retarder may be used
4. A continuous vapor seal is essential around roof edges, parapets, roof-to-wall transitions, and
directly above interior dividers/partitions separating between cold and warmer controlled
environments.
5. Where applicable, ensure the insulated wall panel cap is set in EverGuard® Water Block
Sealant and secured to the wall panel at 6" on center maximum.
6. Fill panel lows with trowel grade polyurethane sealant to achieve a level, smooth surface
approximately 4" to 6" from the top of the panel.
7. Secure cured membrane flashing through the area of the panel that was leveled using
generous application of EverGuard® Water-Block Sealant and the DRILL-TEC™ Termination
Bar fastened to achieve constant compression against the panel.
8. The transition vapor seal can be completed by turning the cured flashing over the roofing
membrane setting each layer in generous beads of EverGuard® Water-Block Sealant as
outlined in the applicable GAF detail.
9. Refer to applicable Cold Storage Details for alternative methods by which a vapor seal can
be achieved.
3.04 FIRE BARRIER/PROTECTION LAYER
A. GENERAL
1. Slip sheet protection layer must typically be installed when required by design professional or
code authority to address code or approval requirements.
2. Fire resistant fiberglass sheet protection layer shall typically be installed when required by
design professionals or code authority to address code or approval requirements or as a
separator layer.
3. Install fiberglass sheet or polymat protection layer loose-applied over substrate surface so
that wrinkles and buckles are not formed.
4. Overlap sheets a minimum of 6" (152 mm) for side and end laps.
5. The substrate must be clean, dry, and free of foreign matter.
6. Install GAF FireOut™ Fire Barrier coating at an application rate of one gallon per 100 sq. ft.
(9.2 sq. m) via spray, brush, or roller.
3.04 INSULATION
A. GENERAL
1. Do not apply roof insulation or roofing until all other work trades have completed jobs that
require them to traverse the deck on foot or with equipment. A vapor retarder coated lightly
with asphalt may be applied to protect the inside of the structure prior to the insulation and
07540-10
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
final roofing installation. Before the application of the insulation, any damage or deterioration
to the vapor retarder must be repaired.
2. Do not install wet, damaged or warped insulation boards.
3. Install insulation boards with staggered board joints in one direction (unless taping joint).
4. Install insulation boards snug. Gaps between board joints must not exceed ¼” (6 mm). All
gaps in excess of ¼” (6 mm) must be filled with like insulation material.
5. Wood nailers must be 3-1/2” (89 mm) minimum width or 1” (25.4 mm) wider than metal
flange. They shall be of equal thickness as the insulation, and be treated for rot resistance.
All nailers must be securely fastened to the deck.
6. Do not kick insulation boards into place.
7. Miter and fill the edges of the insulation boards at ridges, valleys and other changes in plane
to prevent open joints or irregular surfaces. Avoid breaking or crushing of the insulation at the
corners.
8. Insulation should not be installed over new lightweight insulating concrete.
9. Roof tape, if required over insulation joints, must be laid evenly, smoothly and embedded in a
uniform coating of hot steep asphalt with 4” (102 mm) end laps. Care must be taken to assure
smooth application of tape, and full embedment of the tape in the asphalt.
10. Do not install any more insulation than will be completely waterproofed each day.
1. Overlay/re-cover boards may be installed using all full-size overlay boards in a staggered
pattern. Overlay/re-cover boards include gypsum, DensDeck® and SECUROCK® roof board.
If plywood or OSB is specified, it must be a minimum thickness of ¾" (19 mm). Overlay/re-
cover boards are required when using EPS or XPS as the insulation system.
2. When installing the DRILL-TEC™ RhinoBond® Attachment System over tapered insulation,
RhinoBond® plates are to be flat or flush against the insulation surface to ensure proper
welding of the plate to the membrane. For this reason, it is preferable to install the tapered
insulation first and cover the tapered system with an overlay/re-cover board.
3. Do NOT install insulation boards that are wet, warped, or buckled; they must be discarded.
Insulation boards that are broken, cracked, or crushed shall not be installed unless the
damaged area is first removed and discarded.
4. Remove and replace insulation boards that become wet or damaged after installation.
5. Install no more insulation than can be properly covered by the end of each day with roofing
membrane.
B. INSULATION PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT
1. Efforts shall be made so the top layer of insulation is at least 2" thick polyiso or an approved
½” minimum cover board in order to reduce the number of fasteners without jeopardizing the
performance of the roofing assembly.
2. Where the steel deck flutes are perpendicular to the perimeter wall, fill the flutes minimum 12"
away from the wall with spray foam insulation.
C. THERMAL SHORTS/THERMAL BRIDGING
1. To reduce the effects of thermal shorts, roof insulation should be installed in at least two
layers with offset joints to minimize air leakage and movement.
2. To reduce the effects of thermal bridging, the roof membrane and upper layer(s) of rigid
board insulation should be adhered. Mechanical fasteners as the securement method for a
roof membrane or the upper layer(s) of rigid board insulation allows thermal bridging to occur
and is less energy efficient.
3. When the substrate is a steel roof deck, the first layer of insulation (i.e., the layer in direct
contact with the roof deck) may be mechanically attached. Subsequent layers should be
installed with adhesives.
B. INSULATION APPLICATION
1. The insulation must be securely attached to the roof deck. A minimum FMRC 1-60
attachment is recommended. Refer to FMRC Approval Guide for FM fastening patterns.
Factory Mutual requires fastener density increased in corner areas for FM 1-60 as well as
07540-11
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
perimeter and corner area fastener density increases for FM 1-90 or greater. Refer to FM
Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-7, 1-28, and 1-49.
2. Use only fasteners with a minimum 3 inch (76 mm) stress plate when mechanically attaching
insulation. Do not attach insulation with nails.
3. Apply LRF O Adhesive directly to the substrate using a ribbon pattern. Space beads as
required by job specification, typically 6” or 12” (152 mm or 305 mm) o.c.
4. LRF O Adhesive should be approximately 70°F (22°C) when being dispensed. As adhesive is
applied, allow the adhesive to begin rising, then place board.
5. The substrate must be free of and debris, dust, dirt, oil, grease, and standing water before
applying the adhesive.
6. OlyBond 500 must be applied using the specially designed PaceCart dispenser. OlyBond
500 SpotShot shall be applied using one of the specially designed dual cartridge dispensers.
7. Install insulation layers applied with bands of OlyBond 500 spaced 12” o.c. Approximate
coverage rate is ½ to 1 gallon per 100 square feet, depending on the substrate. Allow the
foam to rise ¾” to 1” (25.4 mm). Walk each board firmly into place. Stagger the joints of
additional layers in relation to the insulation joints in the layer(s) below by a minimum of 6”
(152 mm) to eliminate continuous vertical gaps.
8. The substrate must be free of debris, dust, dirt, oil, grease, and standing water before
applying the adhesive.
9. Install insulation layers applied with 3/4” beads of Insta-Stik spaced 12” o.c. Press each
board firmly into place. Stagger the joints of additional layers in relation to the insulation joints
in the layer(s) below by a minimum of 6” (152 mm) to eliminate continuous vertical gaps.
10. Loose apply the base layer of insulation for subsequent layers to be simultaneously attached
or for ballast applications. Minimal fastening should be performed to avoid movement of the
boards.
11. Fill all flutes with a loose applied base layer of insulation. Insulation must be of equal height
as metal ribs, seams or flutes to allow for subsequent layers to be applied without
interference. Minimal fastening should be performed to avoid movement of the boards.
12. If subsequent layers of insulation are to be attached with insulation adhesive, the base layer
must be mechanically attached with a minimum fastener density of 1 fastener every 2 square
feet.
3.01 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. GENERAL
1. Substrates must be inspected and accepted by the contractor as suitable to receive and hold
roof membrane materials.
2. Place roof membrane so that wrinkles and buckles are not formed. Any wrinkles or buckles
must be removed from the sheet prior to permanent securement.
3. Membrane that has been exposed for more than 12 hours or has become contaminated will
require additional cleaning methods.
a) Light Contamination - Membrane that has been exposed overnight up to a few days to
debris, foot traffic, or dew or light precipitation can usually be cleaned with a white cloth
moistened with EverGuard® TPO Cleaner (or EverGuard® CleanWeld™ Conditioner, a
low-VOC cleaner) for TPO membranes.
b) Dirt-Based Contamination - Membrane that is dirt encrusted will require the use of a low-
residue cleaner, such as Formula 409® and a mildly abrasive scrubbing pad to remove
the dirt. This must be followed by cleaning with a white cloth moistened with EverGuard®
TPO Cleaner (or EverGuard® CleanWeld™ Conditioner) for TPO membranes. Be sure to
wait for solvent to flash off prior to welding.
c) Exposure-Based Contamination - Membrane that is weathered or oxidized will require the
use of EverGuard® TPO Cleaner, EverGuard® CleanWeld™ Conditioner, and a mildly
abrasive scrubbing pad to remove the weathered/oxidized top surface layer. This must be
followed by cleaning with a white cloth moistened with EverGuard® TPO Cleaner (or
EverGuard® CleanWeld™ Conditioner) for TPO membranes. Unexposed membrane left
07540-12
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
in inventory for a year or more may need to be cleaned as instructed above. Be sure to
wait for solvent to flash off prior to welding.
d) Chemical-Based Contamination - Membrane that is contaminated with bonding adhesive,
asphalt, flashing cement, grease and oil, and most other contaminants usually cannot be
cleaned sufficiently to allow an adequate heat weld to the membrane surface. These
membranes should be removed and replaced.
A. FULLY ADHERED
1. All work surfaces should be clean, dry, and free of dirt, dust, debris, oils, loose and/or
embedded gravel, un-adhered coatings, deteriorated membrane, and other contaminants that
may result in a surface that is not sound or is uneven.
2. Full-width rolls can be installed throughout the field and perimeter of the roof. Half sheets are
not necessary.
3. Overlap roof membrane a minimum of 3" (76 mm) for end laps. For fleece-back membrane,
butt ends together and cover joint with 8” (203 mm) wide EverGuard Flashing Strip heat-
welded. Membranes are provided with lap lines along the side laps.
4. Best practice is to install membrane so that the side laps run across the roof slope lapped
toward drainage points.
5. All exposed sheet corners must be rounded a minimum of 1" (25 mm).
6. Use full-width rolls throughout the field and perimeter of the roof. Half sheets are not
necessary.
7. Membrane laps shall be heat-welded together. All welds shall be continuous, without voids or
partial welds. Welds shall be free of burns and scorch marks.
8. Weld shall be a minimum of 1” (25.4 mm) in width for automatic machine welding and a
minimum 2” in width for hand welding,
9. Roof membrane must be mechanically attached along the base of walls with screws and
plates 6” (152 mm) on center.
10. Adhesives should be applied to membrane at the rates listed on the pail.
11. Use appropriate bonding adhesive for substrate surface, applied with a solvent-resistant
roller, brush or squeegee
12. Adhere approximately one half of the membrane sheet at a time. One half of the sheet's
length shall be folded back in turn to allow for adhes ive application. Lay membrane into
adhesive once the bonding adhesive is tacky to the touch.
13. Roll membrane with a weighted roller to ensure complete bonding between adhesive and
membrane.
14. Prevent seam contamination by keeping the adhesive application a few inches back from the
seam area.
15. Reference the Adhesive securement tables in the EverGuard® Application and Specifications
Manuals for substrate adhesion and compatibility.
16. Apply LRF Adhesive directly to the substrate using a ribbon pattern. Space beads as required
by job specification, typically 6” or 12” (152 mm or 305 mm) o.c.
17. Apply low rise foam in canisters should be applied in “spatter method” for fleece‐back
membrane applications ONLY.
18. Roll in membrane using a 150 lb. membrane roller or equivalent.
19. To reduce thermal bridging, a full spray of approved Low Rise Foam Adhesive may be used
to attach individual insulation layers or adhere the top layer to a mechanically fastened
bottom layer
3.02 FLASHINGS
A. GENERAL
1. All penetrations must be at least 24” (610 mm) from curbs, walls, and edges to provide
adequate space for proper flashing.
07540-13
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
2. Flash all perimeter, curb, and penetration conditions with coated metal, membrane flashing,
and flashing accessories as appropriate to the site condition.
3. All coated metal and membrane flashing corners shall be reinforced with preformed corners
or non-reinforced membrane.
4. Heat-weld all flashing membranes, accessories, and coated metal. A minimum 2” (52 mm)
wide hand weld or minimum 1” (25 mm) to 1-1/2" (39 mm) automatic machine weld is
required.
5. Consult the EverGuard® Application and Specifications Manual or GAF® Technical Support
Services for more information on specific construction details, or those not addressed in this
section.
6. EverGuard Extreme® flashings and accessories are required for use with EverGuard
Extreme® membranes.
7. Prior to placement of insulation boards, completely fill transition space between roof and any
penetrations with foam pack a minimum of 12” from transition and up to level of cover board
as shown in cold storage details to seal against moisture vapor drive
B. COATED METAL FLASHINGS
1. Coated metal flashings shall be formed in accordance with current EverGuard® construction
details and SMACNA guidelines.
2. Coated metal sections used for roof edging, base flashing and coping shall be butted
together with a ¼” (7 mm) gap to allow for expansion and contraction. Heat-weld a 6” (152
mm) wide reinforced membrane flashing strip to both sides of the joint, with approximately 1”
(25.4 mm) on either side of the joint left un-welded to allow for expansion and contraction. 2”
(52 mm) wide aluminum tape can be installed over the joint as a bond-breaker, to prevent
welding in this area.
3. Coated metal used for sealant pans, scupper inserts, corners of roof edging, base flashing
and coping shall be overlapped or provided with separate metal pieces to create a continuous
flange condition, and pop-riveted securely. Heat-weld a 6” (152 mm) wide reinforced
membrane flashing strip over all seams that will not be sealed during subsequent flashing
installation.
4. Provide a ½” (13 mm) hem for all exposed metal edges to provide corrosion protection and
edge reinforcement for improved durability.
5. Provide a ½” (13 mm) hem for all metal flange edges whenever possible to prevent wearing
of the roofing and flashing membranes at the flange edge.
6. Coated metal flashings shall be nailed to treated wood nailers or otherwise mechanically
attached to the roof deck, wall or curb substrates, in accordance with construction detail
requirements.
C. REINFORCED MEMBRANE FLASHINGS
1. The thickness of the flashing membrane shall be the same as the thickness of the roofing
membrane.
2. Membrane flashing may either be installed loose or fully adhered to the substrate surface in
accordance with “Construction Detail Requirements”.
3. Apply the adhesive only when outside temperature is above 40°F. Recommended minimum
application temperature is 50°F to allow for easier adhesive application. Water-based
adhesives are approved for use with smooth TPO membranes for flashings only
4. The membrane flashing shall be carefully positioned prior to application to avoid wrinkles and
buckles.
5. Please note that solvent-based adhesives must be allowed to dry until tacky to the touch
before mating flashing membrane. Water-based adhesive must be allowed to flash off
completely.
6. Heat-weld all laps in EverGuard® smooth-reinforced flashing membrane in accordance with
heat-welding guidelines. All seams in fleece-back membrane and smooth field sheet must be
stripped in with 8" (203 mm) flashing strip.
07540-14
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
7. For extended length guarantees, separate counter flashing is required; exposed termination
bars are not acceptable
D. UN-REINFORCED MEMBRANE FLASHINGS
1. Un-reinforced membrane is used to field-fabricate penetration or reinforcement flashings in
locations where preformed corners and pipe boots cannot be properly installed.
2. Penetration flashings constructed of un-reinforced membrane are typically installed in two
sections, a horizontal piece that extends onto the roofing membrane and a vertical piece that
extends up the penetration. The two pieces are overlapped and hot-air welded together.
3. Apply the adhesive only when outside temperature is above 40°F. Recommended minimum
application temperature is 50°F to allow for easier adhesive application. Water-based
adhesives are approved for use with smooth TPO membranes for flashings only
4. The membrane flashing shall be carefully positioned prior to application to avoid wrinkles and
buckles.
5. Please note that solvent-based adhesives must be allowed to dry until tacky to the touch
before mating flashing membrane. Water-based adhesive must be allowed to flash off
completely.
E. ROOF EDGES
1. Roof edge flashings are applicable for gravel stop and drip edge conditions as well as for
exterior edges of parapet walls.
2. Flash roof edges with coated metal flanged edging with a minimum 3" (76 mm) wide flange
nailed 4" (102 mm) on center to wood nailers, and heat weld 8” (203 mm) membrane strip to
metal flanges.
3. When the fascia width exceeds 4” (102 mm), coated metal roof edging must be attached with
a continuous cleat to secure the lower fascia edge. The cleat must be secured to the building
no less than 12” (305 mm) o.c.
4. Flash roof edge scuppers with a coated metal insert that is mechanically attached to the roof
edge and integrated as a part of the metal edging.
5. Alternatively, roof edges may be flashed with a 2-piece snap on fascia system, adhering the
roof membrane to a metal cant and face nailing the membrane 8” (152 mm) on center prior to
installing a snap-on fascia.
a) Submit design drawings for review and approval to Architect or Specifier before
fabrication.
b) Installing contractor shall check as-built conditions and verify the manufacturer’s roof
edging details for accuracy to fit the wall assembly prior to fabrication. The installer shall
comply with the roof edging manufacturer’s installation guide when setting edging.
F. PARAPET AND BUILDING WALLS
1. Flash walls with EverGuard® TPO membrane adhered to the substrate with bonding
adhesive, loose applied or with coated metal flashing nailed 4” (102 mm) on center to
pressure-treated wood nailers.
2. Maximum flashing height without intermediate fastening is 24" (610 mm) for loose-applied
flashing and 54" (1.4 m) for adhered flashing
3. Secure membrane flashing at the top edge with a termination bar. EverGuard® Water Block
shall be applied between the wall surface and membrane flashing underneath all exposed
termination bars. Exposed termination bars shall be mechanically fastened 6” (152 mm) on
center for guarantees less than 20 years and 12” (305 mm) on center for guarantees greater
than 20 years or that are counter-flashed.
4. Exposed termination bars must be sealed with Flexseal™ Caulk Grade Sealant.
5. Roof membrane must be mechanically attached along the base of walls with screws and
plates 12” (305 mm) on center [6” (152 mm) on center for Ballasted Systems]
6. Metal cap flashings must have continuous cleats or be face fastened 12" (305 mm) o.c. on
both the inside and outside of the walls.
07540-15
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
7. Flash wall scuppers with a coated metal insert that is mechanically attached to the wall and
integrated as part of the wall flashing.
8. Roof Transition Anchor (R.T.A.) Strip may be installed as the alternate method of base
attachment detail
G. CURBS AND DUCTS
1. Flash curbs and ducts with EverGuard® TPO membrane adhered to the curb substrate with
bonding adhesive, loose applied or with coated metal flashing nailed 4” on center to
pressure-treated wood nailers.
2. Maximum flashing height without intermediate fastening is 24" (610 mm) for loose-applied
flashing and 54" (1.4 m) for adhered flashing
3. Secure membrane flashing at the top edge with a termination bar. EverGuard® Water Block
shall be applied between the wall surface and membrane flashing underneath all exposed
termination bars. Exposed termination bars shall be mechanically fastened 6” (152 mm) on
center for guarantees less than 20 years and 12” (305 mm) on center for guarantees greater
than 20 years or that are counter-flashed.
4. Exposed termination bars must be sealed with Flexseal™ Caulk Grade Sealant.
5. Roof membrane must be mechanically attached along the base of walls with screws and
plates 12” (305 mm) on center [6” (152 mm) on center for Ballasted Systems]
6. Metal counterflashing may be optional with fully adhered flashings depending on guarantee
requirements. Exposed termination bars must be sealed with Flexseal™ Roofing Cement.
7. All coated metal curb flashings and loose applied membrane flashings must be provided with
separate metal counterflashings, or metal copings
H. ROOF DRAINS
1. Roof drains must be fitted with compression type clamping rings and strainer baskets.
Original-type cast iron and aluminum drains, as well as retrofit-type cast iron, aluminum or
molded plastic drains are acceptable.
2. Roof drains must be provided with a minimum 36” x 36” (914 mm x 914 mm) sump if
applicable. Slope of tapered insulation within the sump shall not exceed 4” in 12”.
3. Extend the roofing membrane over the drain opening. Locate the drain and cut a hole in the
roofing membrane directly over the drain opening. Provide a ½” (13 mm) of membrane flap
extending past the drain flange into the drain opening. Punch holes through the roofing
membrane at drain bolt locations.
4. For cast iron and aluminum drains, the roofing membrane must be set in a full bed of
FlexSeal™ Caulk Grade Sealant on the drain flange prior to securement with the
compression clamping ring. Typical application is one 10.5 ounce cartridge of FlexSeal™
Caulk Grade Sealant per drain.
5. Lap seams shall not be located within the sump area. Where lap seams will be located within
the sump area, a separate smooth membrane drain flashing a minimum of 12” (305 mm)
larger than the sump area must be installed. The membrane flashing must be heat-welded to
the roof membrane. Alternately, if the seam does not run under the clamping ring, it can be
covered with a 6" (152 mm) wide reinforced-membrane strip heat-welded to the membrane.
6. Tighten the drain compression ring in place.
I. EXPANSION JOINTS
1. Any prefabricated expansion joint metal nailing strips must be fastened to wood nailers, curbs
or secured to walls with appropriate nails or EverGuard® DRILL-TEC™ Fasteners.
2. Roof membrane must be mechanically attached along the base of raised curb-expansion
joints with screws and plates a minimum of 12" (305 mm) o.c. The expansion joint cover
bellows shall be at least 2 times the expansion joint opening.
3. Metal nailing strip must be set in FlexSeal™ Caulk Grade Sealant and secured with fasteners
and neoprene washers fastened 6" (152 mm) o.c
4. Expansion joints may be field fabricated. Reference appropriate Construction Detail.
07540-16
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
J. SCUPPERS
1. Coated-metal roof-edge scuppers must be provided with a min. 4" (102 mm) wide flange
nailed to wood nailers, with hemmed edges and secured with continuous clips in accordance
with the gravel stop assembly.
2. Coated-metal wall scuppers must be provided with 4" (102 mm) wide flanges, with additional
corner pieces pop-riveted to the flanges to create a continuous flange. All flange corners
must be rounded.
3. Install wall scuppers over the roof and flashing membrane and secure to the roof deck/wall
with DRILL-TEC™ Fasteners 6" (152 mm) o.c., a minimum of 2 fasteners per side.
4. All corners must be reinforced with EverGuard® PVC or EverGuard® TPO Universal
Corners or field-fabricated from EverGuard® non-reinforced materials.
5. Strip-in scupper with flashing membrane target sheet.
6. Alternately, a wall scupper box may be field-flashed using non-reinforced flashing membrane
heat-welded to membrane on the wall face and roof deck. Fully adhere to the scupper box
and terminate on the outside wall face with a termination bar and FlexSeal™ Caulk Grade
sealant.
7. EverGuard® TPO has prefabricated scuppers in standard and custom sizes available.
K. WOOD SUPPORT BLOCKING
1. Wood support blocking, typically 4" x 4" (102 mm x 102 mm), is usually installed under light-
duty or temporary roof-mounted equipment, such as electrical conduit, gas lines,
condensation and drain lines.
2. Install wood support blocking over a protective layer of EverGuard® TPO walkway rolls or
PVC walkway pads. Place wood blocking on oversized slip sheet, fold two sides vertically,
and fasten with roofing nails into the blocking.
3.03 ROOF PROTECTION
A. Protect all partially and fully completed roofing work from other trades until completion.
B. Whenever possible, stage materials in such a manner that foot traffic is minimized over completed
roof areas.
C. When it is not possible to stage materials away from locations where partial or complete installation
has taken place, temporary walkways and platforms shall be installed in order to protect all
completed roof areas from traffic and point loading during the application process.
D. Temporary tie-ins shall be installed at the end of each workday and removed prior to commencement
of work the following day.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A. All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at all times.
B. Do not allow trash, waste, or debris to collect on the roof. These items shall be removed from the
roof on a daily basis.
C. All tools and unused materials must be collected at the end of each workday and stored properly off
of the finished roof surface and protected from exposure to the elements.
D. Dispose of or recycle all trash and excess material in a manner conforming to current EPA
regulations and local laws.
07540-17
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
E. Properly clean the finished roof surface after completion, and make sure the drains and gutters are
not clogged.
F. Clean and restore all damaged surfaces to their original condition.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Inspections to the roof shall be performed annually by a GAF® Master Select contractor.
B. An annual roofing system maintenance program shall be performed by a Master Select contractor
in accordance with GAF®’s 10 Point Maintenance Program provided with your Diamond Pledge
guarantee.
C. Submit copies of the roof inspection form, accompanying photographs (a minimum of 6 photos
showing the condition of the roof and critical details), and a record of all roofing system maintenance
to the GAF® Technical Support Services Department within sixty (60) days of the anniversary date
of the completion of the roofing system. Annual roof inspections must be started within the first two
(2) years of the guarantee term.
END OF SECTION
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 1
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
3. Formed equipment support flashing.
1.2
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each of the following
1. Underlayment materials.
2. Elastomeric sealant.
3. Butyl sealant.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish
between shop- and field-assembled Work.
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats,
clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of
expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, flashings, and
counter flashings.
10. Include details of special conditions.
11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10).
C. Samples for Verification: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches
(300 mm) long by actual width.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 2
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested
and FM Approvals approved.
B. Evaluation Reports: For copings and roof edge flashing, from ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction showing compliance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1.
C. Sample warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
B. Special warranty.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar
to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested and FM Approvals
approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that
shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies, including cleats, anchors, and fasteners, shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim
shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 3
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Architectural
Metal Flashing, Condensation and Air Leakage Control, and Reroofing" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
C. Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to
dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM
4435/ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
E. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and
approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design
approved by FM Approvals.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
2.2 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
2.3 SHEET METALS
A. Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary
protective film before shipping.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper.
1. Nonpatinated, Exposed Finish: Mill.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet in accordance with ASTM
A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet in accordance with
ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted
by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat.
2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating
to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 4
3. Color: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester
backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil
(0.013 mm).
D. Zinc Sheet: Zinc, 99 percent pure, alloyed with 0.08 to 1.00 percent copper, 0.06 to 0.20 percent titanium, and
up to 0.015 percent aluminum; with manufacturer's standard factory-applied, flexible, protective back coating.
1. Finish: Bright rolled.
2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet Underlayment: Not less than 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a
slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified
asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures
beneath metal roofing. Provide primer in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Carlisle WIP Products; a brand of Carlisle Construction Materials.
b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
c. Henry Company.
d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, a Drexel Metals Company.
e. Owens Corning.
f. Protecto Wrap Company.
g. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc.
2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D1970/D1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) or higher.
3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970/D1970M; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29
deg C) or lower.
B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, not less than 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m).
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required
for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet
metal unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other
suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied
coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners
bearing on weather side of metal.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 5
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless steel rivets suitable for metal being
fastened.
2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or passivated Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) and Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300
stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329.
4. Fasteners for Zinc Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release- paper
backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch
(3 mm) thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene
plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations in cited
sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of
item required.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance
requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
3. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered and obtain field measurements for accurate fit
before shop fabrication.
4. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool
marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces
exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4
inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8 inch
(3 mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with
butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal in accordance with cited
sheet metal standard to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 6
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible,
noncorrosive metal.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM
Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being
secured.
G. Seams:
1. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless
otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for
strength.
2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Copings: Fabricate in not less than 96 inch (2400 mm) long, but not more than 12 foot (3.6 m) long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external
leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop
fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Fabricate from one of the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0396 inch (1.01 mm) thick, (20 gage nominal).
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0396 inch (1.01 mm) thick, (20 gage nominal).
B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Fabricate from one of the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.70 mm) thick, (24 gage nominal).
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.70 mm) thick, (24 gage nominal).
C. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Fabricate from one of the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick, (26 gage nominal).
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick, (26 gage nominal).
D. Roof-Penetration Flashing:
1. Fabricate from one of the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.70 mm) thick, (24 gage nominal).
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.70 mm) thick, (24 gage nominal).
E. Roof-Drain Flashing:
1. Fabricate from one of the following materials:
a. Copper: 12 oz./sq. ft. (0.41 mm thick).
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 7
b. Zinc: 0.0320 inch (0.81 mm) thick, (13 gage nominal).
2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches
(100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2 inch (50 mm) high, end dams.
1. Fabricate from one of the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick, (26 gage nominal).
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm)] thick, (26 gage nominal).
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Equipment Support Flashing:
1. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.70 mm) thick, (24 gage nominal).
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.70 mm) thick, (24 gage nominal).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet Underlayment:
1. Install self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Install self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment; wrinkle free.
3. Prime substrate if recommended by self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment manufacturer.
4. Comply with temperature restrictions of self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment
manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing self-adhering, high-temperature sheet
underlayment at low temperatures.
5. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24
inches (600 mm) between courses.
6. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm).
7. Roll laps and edges with roller.
8. Cover self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment within 14 days.
B. Install slip sheet, wrinkle free, over self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment before installing sheet
metal flashing and trim.
1. Install in shingle fashion to shed water.
2. Lap joints not less than 4 inches (100 mm).
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 8
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations of cited sheet metal
standard that apply to installation characteristics required unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
1. Install fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with
minimum exposure of sealant.
3. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
4. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
5. Provide continuous cleats. Attach each cleat as indicated on Drawings but not more than 6 inches
(150 mm) o.c. Attach each cleat with not less than two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
6. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil-canning, and free of buckling and tool
marks.
7. Do not field cut sheet metal flashing and trim by torch.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or
other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited
sheet metal standard.
1. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Space movement joints not more than 10 feet (3 m) o.c. with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of
corner or intersection.
2. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with
sealant concealed within joints.
3. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for
nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws and other substrates not less than recommended by
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility
of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated.
a. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant.
b. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
c. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C),
set joint members for 50 percent movement each way.
d. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.
1) Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 9
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
G. Rivets: Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOF FLASHINGS
A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's
written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard.
1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes.
2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Copings:
1. Install roof edge flashings in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1.
2. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces in accordance with recommendations in cited sheet metal
standard unless otherwise indicated.
a. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate as indicated
on Drawings but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. Attach each cleat with not less than two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
b. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes as indicated
on Drawings but not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Attach each coping with not less than
two fasteners.
3. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces in accordance with recommendations in FM Global Property
Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm
classification.
C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for
elastomeric sealant, extending not less than 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless steel draw
band and tighten.
D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
1. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
2. Extend counterflashing not less than 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing.
3. Lap counterflashing joints not less than 4 inches (100 mm).
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and
other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric or butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate
roof.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF WALL FLASHINGS
A. Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture in accordance with cited sheet
metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-
opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
076200 - 10
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend
not less than 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.
3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4
inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8 inch (3 mm)
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean off excess sealants.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair
by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures, as determined by Architect.
END OF SECTION 076200
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
079200 - 1
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 • SUMMARY
A. • Section Includes:
• Silicone joint sealants.
• Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.
• Urethane joint sealants.
• Mildew-resistant joint sealants.
• Butyl joint sealants.
• Latex joint sealants.
1.2
•
• PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. • Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3
•
• ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. • Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. • Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.
C. • Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
• Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
• Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
• Joint-sealant formulation.
• Joint-sealant color.
1.4
•
• INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. • Product test reports.
B. • Preconstruction laboratory test reports.
C. • Field-adhesion-test reports.
D. • Sample warranties.
1.5
•
• QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. • Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
079200 - 2
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or
replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
.
1
MANUFACTURERS
A
.
Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
2
.
2
SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A
.
Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
2
.
3
JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A
.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50
percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM
C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
d. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
e. Tremco Incorporated.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
079200 - 3
B. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50
percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
d. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
e. Tremco Incorporated.
2.5 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM
C1248.
B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone
joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
d. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
e. Tremco Incorporated.
C. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus
100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-
curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and
NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
d. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
e. Tremco Incorporated.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
079200 - 4
2.6 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus
50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM
C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
d. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
e. Tremco Incorporated.
2.7 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with
fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.
B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-
component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability,
nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
25, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
d. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
e. Tremco Incorporated.
2.8 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C1311.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bostik, Inc.
b. Pecora Corporation.
2.9 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
079200 - 5
A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Everkem Diversified Products, Inc.
b. Franklin International.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
d. Pecora Corporation.
e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
f. Tremco Incorporated.
2.10 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any
of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint
application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended
by sealant manufacturer.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion
of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-
substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint- sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer
or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
079200 - 6
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer
with adjoining surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation
instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements
apply.
B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated.
1. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
2. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform not less than 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint
length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
b. Perform not less than one test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length
thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant
Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail
Procedure, in ASTM C1521.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure
from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered
satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to
comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove
sealants comply with indicated requirements.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
079200 - 7
3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint locations include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers.
b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
c. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units.
d. Joints in stone paving units, including steps.
e. Tile control and expansion joints.
f. Joints between different materials listed above.
g. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant:
a. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT unless otherwise indicated.
b. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT where in contact with porous substances.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint locations include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints in dimension stone cladding.
e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant:
a. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT unless otherwise indicated.
b. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT where in contact with porous substances.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint locations include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Joints between tilt-up concrete panels.
b. Joints where sealant will be painted.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT unless otherwise indicated.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
079200 - 8
1. Joint locations include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring.
d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant:
a. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT unless otherwise indicated.
b. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT where in contact with porous substances.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint locations include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry, concrete, walls, and partitions.
d. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete beams and planks.
e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant:
a. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT unless otherwise indicated.
b. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT where in contact with porous substances.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces not subject to significant movement.
1. Joint locations include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls where sealant will be
painted.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior
doors, windows, and elevator entrances.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range.
G. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and
horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
079200 - 9
1. Joint locations include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range.
H. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.
1. Joint locations include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Aluminum thresholds.
b. Sill plates.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: Black unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 079200
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
081113- 1
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.
1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Interior standard steel doors and frames.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type.
2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal
thicknesses.
C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate
with final door hardware schedule.
1. Indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Field quality control reports.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and
number to which door accesses.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of fire-
rated door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 80, Section 5.2.3.1 and
the following:
1. Door and Hardware Institute Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
081113- 2
B. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of
egress door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section
7.2.1.15.4 and the following:
1. Door and Hardware Institute Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
1. Airtec Corporation.
2. Apex Industries, Inc.
3. Baron Metal Industries Inc.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Black Mountain Door, LLC.
5. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.
6. Concept Frames, Inc.
7. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.
8. Custom Metal Products.
9. Daybar Industries, Ltd.
10. DE LA FONTAINE.
11. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
12. Deronde Products.
13. DKS Steel Door & Frame Systems, Inc.
14. Door Components, Inc.
15. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; Assa Abloy Group Company.
16. Gensteel Doors, Inc.
17. HMF Express, LLC.
18. Hollow Metal Inc.
19. Hollow Metal Xpress.
20. JR Metal Frames Manufacturing, Inc.
21. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.
22. L.I.F. Industries, Inc.
23. LaForce, Inc.
24. Megamet Industries, Inc.
25. Mesker Door Inc.
26. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp.
27. Michbi Doors Inc.
28. MPI Group, LLC (The).
29. National Custom Hollow Metal Doors & Frames.
30. North American Door Corp.
31. Philipp Manufacturing Co (The).
32. Pioneer Industries.
33. Premier Products, Inc.
34. Republic Doors and Frames.
35. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.
36. Security Metal Products; a brand of ASSA ABLOY.
37. Shanahan's Manufacturing Limited.
38. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
081113- 3
39. Steward Steel Door & Frame Division.
40. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.
41. Trillium Steel Doors Limited.
42. West Central Manufacturing, Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CBC and the 2019 ADA Standards for Accessible
Design.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection
ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft
control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based
on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated on Drawings and at vertical exit enclosures
and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature
end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of
standard fire-test exposure.
B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 and listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-
protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
C. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U-factor of not more
than
0.50 deg Btu/F x h x sq. ft. (2.84 W/K x sq. m) when tested according to ASTM C518.
2.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All insulation provided for use on this project shall be identified as required by Section 12-13-
1557 of the California Referenced Standards Code (Part 12, Title 24, C.C.R.); Chapter 12-13
"Standards For Insulating Material", (See Part 6, Title 24, C.C.R.); Department Of Consumer
Affairs, Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; Article 3: "Standards for
Insulating Material".
2.5 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
081113- 4
2.6 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A. Construct hollow-metal doors to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication,
hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A.
1. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, not less than 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) thick,
(16 gage nominal), with not less than A40 (ZF120) coating.
d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
e. Edge Bevel: Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm).
f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same
material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration.
g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of
same material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of
exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.
h. Core: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene, polyurethane, or polyisocyanurate.
i. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard laminated mineral board core for fire-rated doors.
2. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.7 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting,
or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.
E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers
manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.
F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors to receive templated mortised
hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and
tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
081113- 5
2.9 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for
substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged
exposure.
2.10 LOUVERS
A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111, with blades or baffles
formed of 0.059 inch (1.51 mm) thick, (16 gage nominal), cold-rolled steel sheet, with not less than
A40 (ZF120) coating, set into frame formed of 0.059 inch (1.51 mm) thick, (16 gage nominal), cold-
rolled steel sheet, with not less than A40 (ZF120) coating.
1. Sight proof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted-V or inverted-Y blades.
B. Form corners of moldings with hairline joints. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and
on secure side of interior doors and frames.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling,
and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch
up factory- applied finishes where spreaders are removed.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without
damage to completed Work.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding
face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on
exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.
b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.
3. Floor Anchors: Secure with post installed expansion anchors.
4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
081113- 6
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs
on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
specified below.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Install according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke- and Draft-Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 105.
C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-
metal manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection Agency: Owner will engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to
furnish reports to Architect.
B. Inspections:
1. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated door according to NFPA 80, Section
5.2.
2. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door
equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically
controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements
according to NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.
C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply
with specified requirements.
D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door
assembly installations comply with specified requirements.
E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly indicating
compliance with each item listed in NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer.
1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers so that from an open
position of 90 degrees, the time required to move the door to a position 12 degrees from
the latch is not less than 5 seconds.
2. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust spring hinges so that from an open
position of 70 degrees, the time required to move the door to the closed position is not
less than 1.5 seconds.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
081113- 7
B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow- metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
C. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
3.5
CLEANING AND TOUCHUP
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084100-1
SECTION 081400 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood doors of the following types:
1. Wood veneer faced doors. (Commercial Series)
2. Light frames
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames.
B. Section 08710 - Security Door Hardware.
C. Section 08813 - Glass Glazing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM D 1037 - Methods for Evaluating the Properties of Wood-Based Fiber and
Particle Board
2. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
3. ASTM E 152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI A 208.1 - Standard for Particleboard.
2. ANSI A 208.2 - Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use.
C. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA):
1. WDMA I.S. 1A-13 - Industry Standard for Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors.
2. WDMA I.S. 6A-13 - Industry Standard for Interior Architectural Stile and Rail Doors.
D. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS):
1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Quality Standards Illustrated (QSI).
2. Woodwork Institute (WI): Manual of Millwork (MM).
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
F. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL):
1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. UL 752 - Bullet-Resisting Equipment.
G. ITS (Warnock Hersey): Certification Listings for Fire Doors.
H. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): Guidelines for environmentally certified wood doors.
I. US Green Building Council (USGBC): LEED - Leadership in Energy and Environmental
Design rating system.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084100-2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300 - Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product construction data, hardware attachment performance
data, specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door, including details
of core, raised panel (if applicable) and edge construction, trim for lite openings and similar
components:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Cleaning methods.
C. Product Certification: Provide documents showing compliance to the following WDMA door
attributes, validating the specified WDMA Performance Duty Level:
1. Adhesive Bonding Durability: WDMA TM-6.
2. Cycle Slam: WDMA TM-7.
3. Hinge Loading: WDMA TM-8.
4. Screw Holding: WDMA TM-10.
a. Door Face.
b. Vertical Door Edge.
c. Horizontal Door Edge (applies when hardware is attached).
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of
door; construction details and the following:
1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.
2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4. Undercuts.
5. Requirements for veneer matching.
6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
E. Verification Samples:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches
(200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish.
2. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing
typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished work.
3. Provide construction samples of doors, approximately 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm),
with door faces and vertical edges representing actual construction to be used.
a. Provide unfinished samples for each species of veneer and required if factory
furnishing is not required, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm).
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified
herein with a minimum of five years documented experience.
1. A qualified manufacturer that is a member in good standing of the Window and Door
Manufacturers Association.
2. A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited
certification body.
a. Doors requiring environmental certification will be marked with Forest
Stewardship Council (FSC) Chain of Custody Certificate Code to ensure wood
components come from certified forests and are processed by certified chain-
of-custody manufacturers.
b. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084100-3
accredited certification body. Vendors installing FSC doors are not required to
be FSC COC certified unless modifying the product beyond what is required for
installation purposes.
B. Single Source Requirements: Doors shall be supplied from a single manufacturing
organization.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations of industry standards.
B. Store materials in manufacturer's original sealed, labeled packaging until ready for
installation and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect from damage.
C. Store and protect doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations including but
not limited to the following.
1. Compliance: WDMA Standards.
2. Store doors flat and off the floor on a level surface in a dry, well-ventilated building. Do
not store on edge. Protect/cover doors from dirt, water and abuse.
3. Certain wood species are light sensitive. Protect doors from exposure to light (artificial
or natural) after delivery.
4. When handling doors, always lift and carry. Do not drag across other doors or
surfaces. Handle with clean hands or gloves.
5. Each door will be marked on top rail with opening number.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
1. Environmental Limits: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating
and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F (16 and 32 degrees C)
and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction
period.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch
(1067-by-2134-mm) section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-
inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
B. Architectural Series Solid Core Doors:
1. Door Warranty - Life of the Original Installation.
C. Commercial Series Solid Core Doors:
1. Door Warranty - Life of the Original Installation
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mohawk, Trudoor
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084100-4
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
012500 - Product Requirements.
2.2 DOORS - GENERAL
A. Quality Standard:
1. Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Comply with WDMA I.S. 6A-13, "Industry Standard for
Interior Architectural Stile and Rail Doors."
2. Flush Wood Doors: Comply with WDMA I.S. 1A-13, "Industry Standard for Interior
Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
a. Grade LD-1.
b. Grade LD-2.
B. Wood-Based Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Provide wood-based particleboard core doors with a minimum density per ANSI
A208.1,
C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Provide Structural Composite Lumber core as required to meet WDMA Performance
Duty Level required.
2. Provide Structural Composite Lumber core for doors with glass openings as required
to meet stile dimensions shown on door schedule and elevations.
3. Provide Structural Composite Lumber core for all doors with the exception of 45 to 90
minute fire rated and sound rated doors.
4. Top and Bottom Rails: Mill Option including; Softwood, Hardwood, or SCL. MDF rails
are not acceptable. Rails are not required per WDMA standards.
5. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA T.M.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: Per standard.
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: Per standard.
D. Stave Lumber Core Doors:
1. Mill option finger jointed or butt glued wood block pine, fir, or poplar. Lumber density is
25 to 27 lbs per cubic foot.
2. FSC/No UF Stave Lumber Core.
E. AgriFiber Core: LD-1 produced from Rapidly Renewable wheat straw.
F. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Regional Materials: Where available based on inclusive list of approved
manufacturers, flush wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of
Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well
as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
2. Certified Wood: Flush wood doors shall be certified according to FSC STD-01-001,
"FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC
Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." FSC claims are to be based on "new"
wood contribution only. All recycled, reclaimed, and recovered material, even if it is
FSC Recycled, shall be applied towards the MR 4 credit.
3. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products
that do not contain added urea formaldehyde.
4. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors that comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084100-5
Environmental Chambers." All composite wood and agrifiber products shall meet this
requirement. Prefer products that are third party certified through SCS Indoor
Advantage Gold.
G. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
1. Label Certification: Doors requiring fire-rating will carry either UL or ITS (Warnock
Hersey) label. Manufacturer's certification labels may be used for door size variations
if approved by AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction).
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures and exit
passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point
of not more than 250 degrees F (121 degrees C) above ambient after 30 minutes of
standard fire-test exposure.
3. 20 Minute Rated Door Lite Openings: Maximum 1296 sq/in (8361 sq/cm) 36 inches W
and 54 inches - H (914 mm and 1372 mm) with approved intumescent lined cut- out.
4. Cores: 45 Minute Particleboard-Core. Extra Heavy Duty 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) door
only.
5. Cores: 45, 60, 90 Minute Mineral Core. Non-Asbestos material.
6. Cores: 20 and 45 Minute AgriFiber.
7. Blocking: Provide composite blocking approved for use in doors of fire-protection
ratings indicated as needed to maintain WDMA performance level and eliminate
through-bolting hardware.
8. Edge Construction: Category A - intumescent included in door construction where
required.
9. Edge Construction: Category B - intumescent applied to frames by door installer
where required.
10. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals.
11. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals as required.
a. Provide steel edges and astragals primed for field painting.
b. Provide veneer wrapped steel edges and astragals. Veneer shall be same
specie as face.
c. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel, color as selected from
manufacturer's standard offering.
d. Provide stainless steel edges and astragals.
H. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control,
based on testing according to UL 1784.
2.3 WOOD VENEER FACED DOORS
A. Commercial Interior Doors:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mohawk;
"Commercial Series" or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Algoma.
b. Marshfield.
c. Trudoor
d. Baillargeon.
2. Veneer Grade: A (best suited for most commercial applications).
3. Veneer Cut: Match Existing
4. Veneer Matching: Match Existing
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Faces: Match Existing
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide matching for door hung in same opening or separated
only by mullions. Provide sets up to four doors.
7. Species: Match Existing
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084100-6
8. Transom Match: Continuous Match.
9. WDMA I.S.1A-13 Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
10. WDMA I.S.1A-13 Glue Bond: Type II.
11. WDMA I.S.1A-13 Glue Bond: Type I.
12. Exposed Vertical Edges: Mill option softwood.
13. Exposed Vertical Edges: Compatible/Matching Veneer.
14. Exposed Rail Edges: Mill option softwood or SCL.
15. Core: As specified or required by schedule.
16. Floating Construction: 5-ply, Loose-lay, stiles and rails not bonded to core.
17. Bonded Construction: 5-ply, edges bonded to core, and then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
18. Door Thickness 1-3/4 inch (44mm).
19. Finishing: Factory Finish.
20. All doors shall meet specified WDMA Performance Duty Level, including face screw
holding requirement. Surface applied hardware shall be installed with screws; through
bolts are not acceptable.
21. All doors shall meet specified WDMA Performance Duty Level, with the exception of
face screw holding requirement. Surface applied hardware shall be installed with
through bolts.
2.4 LIGHT FRAMES
A. Factory Glazing: Refer to Section 08830 - Mirrored Glass Glazing for glass view panels in
doors.
1. Factory install glass as required.
2. Factory install glass in fire rated doors only.
3. Fill glazing bead nail holes in factory finished doors.
4. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors:
a. Wood Species: Provide manufacturer's standard flush wood beads unless
otherwise indicated.
b. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
c. Wood Species: Species compatible with door faces.
d. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
e. Profile: Flush rectangular beads for 1/8 inch (3 mm) and 1/4 inch (6 mm)
glazing, profile per Mohawk standard.
f. Profile: Wood lip beads for 1/8 inch (3 mm) and 1/4 inch (6 mm) glazing, profile
per Mohawk standard.
g. Profile: Wood lite insert for 1/8 inch (3 mm), 1/4 inch (6 mm) and 1/2 inch (13
mm) glazing, profile per Mohawk standard.
h. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads
and metal glazing clips as required and approved for such use.
5. Light Openings in 20 Minute Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard solid wood-
beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-
protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for
opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
a. Profile: Lip per Mohawk standard.
b. Profile: Flush per Mohawk standard.
6. Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard low profile narrow metal
frame formed of 18 ga. cold rolled steel, cold-rolled steel sheet approved for use in
doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Model 110 as manufactured by All Metal
Stamping, Inc.
a. Factory primed for paint.
b. Wood veneer species matching door.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084100-7
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and
dimensions. Do not machine doors for surface hardware.
B. Factory pre-drill all pilot holes for installation of template hinges.
C. Factory prefit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime all faces and vertical edges with one coat offactory
primer.
2.7 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. All doors to be
finished at factory ( including faces, vertical edges, lite beads and moldings). Seal top and
bottom rails as required for warranty purposes.
1. Finish System:
a. Transparent Finish: Mohawk Premium 2000 Finish. WDMA I.S.1A-13 System
TR-8. UV cured, acrylated polyester/urethane.
b. Opaque Finish: Mohawk Premium 2000 Finish. WDMA I.S.1A-13 System OP-8,
UV cured acrylated polyester/urethane.
B. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade Premium.
2. Finish Stain: Match Existing
3. Sheen: Satin
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine and prepare openings and substrates using the methods recommended by
manufacturer for achieving best result for the substrates under project conditions.
1. Confirm that frames comply with type, size, location and swing requirements and that
they are installed plumb and square.
2. Inspect doors for any damage, manufacturing defects or pre-finish inconsistency prior
to installation, including but not limited to wrong color or poor finish.
B. Do not proceed with installation until openings and substrates have been prepared using the
methods recommended by manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer's recommended
tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of
conditions.
C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations
from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, refer to Section 08710 - Security Door Hardware "Door
Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084100-8
2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of
cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide
1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge
edges.
3. Trim bottom rail only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not trim factory finished doors for width.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Correct any deficiency that prohibits the door from swinging or operating freely.
Do not remove hinge screws after initial insertion. Shims used for alignment purposes shall
be inserted between hinge and frame. Do not insert shims between hinge and door.
B. To prevent stile failure, insure that door closers are properly adjusted and do not limit the
door opening swing. Limit door opening swing only with a properly located stop.
C. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084113 - 1
SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum-framed storefront systems.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size
details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and
assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer.
B. Product test reports.
C. Sample warranties.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084113 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by
manufacturer.
B. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality-control inspections of egress door assemblies
shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4 and the following:
1. DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects
and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements,
alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to
adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed
entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed storefront system, including framing and
accessories, from single manufacturer.
2.2
ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CBC and the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
2.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements," to design aluminum-framed storefronts.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084113 - 3
B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-
framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure,
including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly
distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units.
C. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows:
1. Air Leakage:
a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: Air leakage for the system of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft.
(0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) when tested
according to ASTM E283.
b. Entrance Doors: Air leakage of not more than 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5.08 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-
pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
D. Interstory Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated.
1. Design Displacement: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Test Performance: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested
according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.
E. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy
type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design
displacement.
2. Vertical Interstory Movement: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type
when tested according to AAMA 501.7 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
2.4 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084113 - 4
2.5 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Arcadia, Inc.; AG451T Series,
Thermal, 2 inch by 4-1/2 inch, Center Glazed System For 1 inch Glass, or a comparable product by one of the
following:
1. Avanti Systems, Inc.
2. Arcadia, Inc.
3. CMI Architectural.
4. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc.
5. Coral Industries, Inc.
6. EFCO Corporation.
7. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company.
8. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc.
9. Manko Window Systems, Inc.
10. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.
11. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.
12. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.
13. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC.
14. Tubelite Inc.
15. U.S. Aluminum; a brand of C.R. Laurence.
16. YKK AP America Inc.
B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and
reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Interior Framing Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Center.
4. Finish: Dark Bronze anodic finish.
5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.
C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where
framing abuts adjacent construction.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous
shims for aligning system components.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084113 - 5
2.6 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient
elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.7 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429/B429M.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.
B. Steel Reinforcement:
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
C. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with
SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface
preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to
applicable SSPC standard.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove
weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required
glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084113 - 6
entrance door hardware.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible.
Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Match Existing finish and color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration
and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact
surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive
spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants,"
to produce weathertight installation.
D. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING
A. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Egress Door Inspections:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
084113 - 7
1. Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door equipped with fire exit hardware, each door
located in an exit enclosure, each electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special
locking arrangements according to NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.
2. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements.
3. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly
installations comply with specified requirements.
4. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each egress door assembly indicating compliance with
each item listed in NFPA 101.
C. Aluminum-framed storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 084113
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-1
SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for:
a. Swinging doors.
B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this
section for:
1. Windows
2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets
3. Signage
4. Toilet accessories
5. Overhead doors
6. Installation.
7. Rough hardware.
8. Conduit, junction boxes & wiring.
9. Folding partitions, except cylinders where detailed.
10. Sliding aluminum doors, except cylinders where detailed.
11. Access doors and panels, except cylinders where detailed.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section.
2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold
installation specified in this section.
3. Division 09 sections for touchup finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by
this section.
4. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring.
5. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control
system.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories
1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies
2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies
3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-2
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and
Specialties
C. California Code of Regulations
1. Title 24: California Building Standards Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements.
B. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for each item
of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and
other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of
electrified door hardware, indicating:
a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including:
1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security
systems.
2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware.
3) Point-to-point wiring.
4) Risers.
3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample
installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full
description for coordination with schedule.
a. Samples will be returned to supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable
to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within
limitations of key coordination requirements.
4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as
illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door
and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each
door or opening, include:
a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set
number.
b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each
opening.
c. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
d. Name and manufacturer of each item.
e. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings.
g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
h. Mounting locations for hardware.
i. Door and frame sizes and materials.
j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product.
k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits,
electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches,
magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components).
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-3
Operational description should include how door will operate on egress, ingress, and
fire and smoke alarm connection.
1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with
submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate
submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other
work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction
schedule.
5. Key Schedule:
a. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with Owner representatives and hardware supplier to
determine system keyway(s), keybow styles, structure, stamping, degree of physical
security and degree of geographic exclusivity. Furnish Owner’s written approval of
the system; do not order keys or cylinders without written confirmation of actual
requirements from the Owner.
b. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as
explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled.
c. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as
guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying
system.
d. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance
with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each
key to unique door designations.
e. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross
keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.
f. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic
illustrating system usage and expansion.
1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by
means as directed by Owner.
6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors,
frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware installation.
C. Informational Submittals:
1. Qualification Data: For Supplier and Installer.
2. Product Certificates for electrified door hardware, signed by manufacturer:
a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated
doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.
3. Certificates of Compliance:
a. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance,
signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination
conference, specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.
4. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operations and Maintenance Data : Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include:
a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and
replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.
b. Catalog pages for each product.
c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.
d. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-4
e. Final keying schedule
f. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage
and 110 volts.
g. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to
identify project.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Substitutions: Comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and as
specified herein.
1. Where specific manufacturer’s product is named and accompanied by “No Substitute,”
including make or model number or other designation, provide product specified. (Note:
Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project
suitability.)
a. Where no additional products or manufacturers are listed in product category,
requirements for “No Substitute” govern product selection.
2. Where products indicate “acceptable manufacturers” or “acceptable manufacturers and
products”, provide product from specified manufacturers, subject to compliance with
specified requirements and “Single Source Responsibility” requirements stated herein.
B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with
record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity,
type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.
1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
3. Coordination Responsibility: Coordinate installation of electronic security hardware with
Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect
and other related subcontractors.
a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that
all components are working properly.
C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial grade
hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar
in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.
D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.
1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
E. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with
NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwriters Laboratories,
Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing
at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with
requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-5
F. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door
assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies
tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at
tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.
G. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 5 lbs (67 N) to release latch.
Locks do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
I. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of wrist
and that operate with force of not more than 5 lbs (22.2 N).
2. Maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbs (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.
b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbs (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch.
c. Fire Doors: The minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative
authority, not to exceed 15 lbs (66.7N).
3. Bevel raised thresholds with slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
4. Adjust closer so that the time required to move the door from the 90 degree position to 12
degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum.
J. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 01.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware.
4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware.
5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
K. Coordination Conferences:
1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold
meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of
door hardware.
a. Attendees: Door hardware supplier, door hardware installer, Contractor.
b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when meeting was
held and who was in attendance.
2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware,
schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors
and frames, and other related suppliers.
a. Attendees: electrified door hardware supplier, doors and frames supplier, electrified
door hardware installer, electrical subcontractor, Owner, Owner’s security consultant,
Architect and Contractor.
b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when coordination
conference was held and who was in attendance.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-6
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware
schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each
item or package.
1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging.
C. Project Conditions:
1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and
installation periods.
2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project, but not yet installed.
Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be
delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
D. Protection and Damage:
1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping.
2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or
repair products damaged during Work.
3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical
agent.
E. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction.
Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements
are specified in Division 03.
B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made
for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's
security consultant.
D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door
hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.
E. Existing Openings:
1. Prior to submittal, carefully inspect existing conditions to verify finish hardware required to
complete Work, including sizes, quantities, existing hardware scheduled for re-use, and
sill condition material. If conflict between the specified/scheduled hardware and existing
conditions, submit request for direction from Architect. Include date of jobsite visit in the
submittal.
2. Submittals prepared without thorough jobsite visit by qualified hardware expert will be
rejected as non-compliant.
F. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by Contractor.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-7
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated.
a. Closers:
1) Mechanical: 30 years.
b. Automatic Operators: 1 year.
c. Exit Devices:
1) Mechanical: 3 years.
d. Locksets:
1) Mechanical: 3 years.
2) Electrified: 1 year.
e. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty
f. Key Blanks: Lifetime
2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation,
improper use or abuse.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools:
1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of
hardware, including changing of cylinders.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Where “No Substitute” is noted, submittals and substitution requests for other products will
not be considered.
B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as “Scheduled
Manufacturer” or “Acceptable Manufacturer” in the individual article for the product category
shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein.
C. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is
contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all
requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.
D. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish
each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.
E. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring
hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject
to Architect's approval.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-8
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Fasteners
1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared
for machine screw installation.
2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under
any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work,
to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted
finish.
3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except
when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not
use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other
work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door
specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.
4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer.
B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Where existing door hardware is indicated to
be removed and reinstalled.
1. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with
existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing
door and frame preparations.
2. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas.
3. When modifying existing fire-rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as
required to maintain fire-rating.
C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for
hardware installation.
1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material.
2.3 HINGES
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series
2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, McKinney TA/T4A series,
Stanley FBB Series
B. Requirements:
1. Provide five-knuckle ball bearing hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1.
2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high
b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high
3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
4. 2 inches or thicker doors:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-9
5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and
one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.
6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges
of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame.
7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins
b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins
c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins
d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins
e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins
8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches
(127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door,
frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.
9. Doors 36 inches (914 mm) wide or less furnish hinges 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high; doors
greater than 36 inches (914 mm) wide furnish hinges 5 inches (127 mm) high, heavy
weight or standard weight as specified.
10. Provide hinges with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with
sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.
Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking
component.
11. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified.
12. Provide spring hinges where specified. Provide two spring hinges and one bearing hinge
per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height. Provide one additional
bearing hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.
2.4 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Aluminum Geared
1. Manufacturers:
a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Markar, Stanley.
2. Requirements:
a. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.26,
Grade 1.
b. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the hardware sets,
fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum, with 0.25-inch (6 mm) diameter Teflon coated
stainless steel hinge pin.
c. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating
operation.
d. Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and
successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles.
e. On fire-rated doors, provide aluminum geared continuous hinges that are classified
for use on rated doors by testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.
f. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges with electrified option scheduled in the
hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate
electric function of specified hardware.
g. Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer.
h. Provide hinges 1 inch (25 mm) shorter in length than nominal height of door, unless
otherwise noted or door details require shorter length and with symmetrical hole
pattern.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-10
2.5 FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:
1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or
stainless steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and
strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286
mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6
inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dust-
proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.
2.6 COORDINATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:
1. Where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other
hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors, provide bar-type coordinating
device, surface applied to underside of stop at frame head.
2. Provide filler bar of correct length for unit to span entire width of opening, and appropriate
brackets for parallel arm door closers and surface vertical rod exit device strikes.
Factory-prep coordinators for vertical rod devices if required.
2.7 MORTISE LOCKS
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage L9000 series
B. Requirements:
1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1
Operational, Grade 1 Security, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing
components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Provide lock
case that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening case.
Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
2. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm)
throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch
(25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.
3. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.
4. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Where scheduled, provide
a request to exit (RX) switch that is actuated with rotation of inside lever.
5. Provide motor based electrified locksets with electrified options as scheduled in the
hardware sets and comply with the following requirements:
a. Universal input voltage – single chassis accepts 12 or 24V DC to allow for changes in
the field without changing lock chassis.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-11
b. Fail Safe/Fail Secure – changing mode between electrically locked (fail safe) and
electrically unlocked (fail secure) is field selectable without opening the lock case
c. Low maximum current draw – maximum 0.4 amps to allow for multiple locks on a
single power supply.
d. Low holding current – maximum 0.01 amps to produce minimal heat, eliminate “hot
levers” in electrically locked applications, and to provide reliable operation in wood
doors that provide minimal ventilation and air flow.
e. Request to Exit Switch (RX) –
1) Modular Design – provide electrified locks capable of using, adding, or changing
a modular RX switch without opening the lock case.
2) Monitoring – where scheduled, provide a request to exit (RX) switch that detects
rotation of the inside lever.
f. Connections – provide quick-connect Molex system standard.
g. UL Listed – 3 hour fire door
6. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with
wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece
spindles.
a. Lever Design: As scheduled.
2.8 EXIT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 98 series
B. Requirements:
1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit
or Fire Exit Hardware. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
2. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or
aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware.
3. Touchpad: Extend minimum of one half of door width. Match exit device finish, stainless
steel for US26, US26D, US28, US32, and US32D finishes; and for all other finishes,
provide compatible finish to exit device. No plastic inserts are allowed in touchpads.
4. Provide exit devices with dead-latching feature for security and for future addition of
alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements.
5. Provide flush end caps for exit devices.
6. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes.
7. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height
recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and
approved by Architect.
8. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind
devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits.
9. Provide cylinder dogging at non-fire-rated exit devices.
10. Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm) x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled
as keyed removable mullion, provide type that can be removed by use of a keyed
cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed.
11. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty
lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will
travel to 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and
which can easily be re-set.
a. Lever Style: Match lever style of locksets.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-12
12. Accessibility: Maximum 5lbs force to retract latch bolt per CBC Chapter 11B.
“AX” feature: touchpad directly retracts the latchbolt with 5 lb or less of force. Provide
testing lab certification confirming that the mechanical device is independent third-
party tested to meet this 5 lb requirement.
13. Provide UL labeled fire exit hardware for fire rated openings.
14. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly
corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets.
15. Provide electrified options as scheduled.
2.9 CYLINDERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Corbin-Russwin 77 Kwy
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: No Substitute
B. Requirements:
1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores to match Owner’s existing key system, compliant with
ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision, Section 12, Grade 1; permanent cylinders; cylinder
face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING”
article, herein.
2. Replaceable Construction Cylinders
a. Provide temporary construction cylinders replaceable by permanent cylinders,
furnished in accordance with the following requirements.
1) 12 construction change (day) keys.
b. Contractor will replace temporary construction cylinders with permanent cylinders.
2.10 KEYING
A. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing keying system managed by Owner’s
locksmith, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made
at keying conference. Contact:
1. Firm Name:
2. Contact Person:
3. Telephone:
B. Requirements:
1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following
key system.
a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner.
2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner.
Failure to comply with forwarding requirements shall be cause for replacement of
cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner.
3. Provide keys with the following features:
a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm)
4. Identification:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-13
a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI
publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Blind code marks
shall not include actual key cuts.
b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner.
c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as
established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO
NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the
patent protection.
d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements shall be cause for replacement of keys
involved at no additional cost to Owner.
e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as
directed by Owner.
5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.
a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core.
b. Master Keys: 6.
2.11 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Telkee
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: HPC, Lund
B. Requirements:
1. Provide key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips,
receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and
standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for
150% of number of locks required for Project.
a. Provide complete cross index system set up by hardware supplier, and place keys on
markers and hooks in cabinet as determined by final key schedule.
b. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.
2.12 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4040XP series.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA
certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date
of manufacture code.
2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high strength cast
iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft.
3. Cylinder Body: 1-1/2-inch (38 mm) diameter piston with 5/8-inch (16 mm) diameter
double heat-treated pinion journal. QR code with a direct link to maintenance instructions.
4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal
closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.
5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing
reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. Provide snap-on
cover clip, with plastic covers, that secures cover to spring tube.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-14
6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for
latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. Provide graphically labelled instructions on
the closer body adjacent to each adjustment valve. Provide positive stop on reg valve
that prevents reg screw from being backed out.
7. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty
forged forearms for parallel arm closers.
8. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.
9. Finish for Closer Cylinders, Arms, Adapter Plates, and Metal Covers: Powder coating
finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in
ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117, or has special rust inhibitor (SRI).
10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as
required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer
mounting.
2.13 DOOR TRIM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:
1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch
(1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches
(102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.
2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push
bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required,
mount back to back with pull.
3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where
required, mount back to back with push bar.
4. Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model.
5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required,
mount back to back with push bar.
6. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1
mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use
of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.
7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled.
8. Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with pull.
2.14 PROTECTION PLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:
1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick,
beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to
match plates.
2. Sizes of plates:
a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on
single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-15
b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single
doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
c. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on
single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
2.15 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rixson
B. Requirements:
1. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for exterior
and interior vestibule single acting doors.
2. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for double
acting doors.
3. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or
holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead
stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking
wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow
wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard.
4. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and
positive type at doors with closer.
2.16 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Provide door stops at each door leaf:
1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are
used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.
2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise
options.
3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted
overhead stop.
2.17 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard, Pemko
B. Requirements:
1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and
gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural
details. Match finish of other items.
2. Size of thresholds:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-16
a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width
b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door
width
3. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient
or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.
2.18 SILENCERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:
1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames.
2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for
each pair frame.
3. Omit where gasketing is specified.
2.19 MAGNETIC HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: LCN
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rixson
B. Requirements:
1. Provide wall or floor mounted electromagnetic door release as specified with minimum of
25 pounds of holding force. Coordinate projection of holder and armature with other
hardware and wall conditions to ensure that door sits parallel to wall when fully open.
Connect magnetic holders on fire-rated doors into the fire control panel for fail-safe
operation.
2.20 LATCH PROTECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Provide stainless steel latch protectors of type required to function with specified lock.
2.21 FINISHES
A. Finish: BHMA 613/640 (US10B); except:
1. Continuous Hinges: US32D (BHMA 630).
2. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 710 (US10B)
3. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match.
4. Latch Protectors: US32D (BHMA 630).
5. Weatherstripping: Dark Bronze Anodized Aluminum.
6. Thresholds: Extruded Architectural Bronze, Oil-Rubbed
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly
construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Existing frames and doors to be retrofitted with new hardware:
1. Field-verify conditions and dimensions prior to ordering hardware. Fill existing hardware
cut outs not being reused by the new hardware. Remove existing hardware not being
reused, return to Owner unless directed otherwise.
2. Remove existing floor closers not scheduled for reuse, fill cavities with non-shrinking
concrete and finish smooth.
3. Cut and weld existing steel frames currently prepared with 2.25 inch height strikes. Cut
an approximate 8 inch section from the strike jamb and weld in a reinforced section to
accommodate specified hardware’s strike.
4. Patch and weld flush filler pieces into existing door hardware preparations in steel doors
and frames, leave surfaces smooth.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required:
1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect,
tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein.
2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed.
3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible.
4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for
new door hardware and with:
a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and
frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for
Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware
preparation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-18
C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate.
Protect all installed hardware during painting.
D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or
excessive clearance.
G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer
than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every
30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent
means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.
1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section.
I. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for:
1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls.
2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware.
3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system.
4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as
directed by Architect.
5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect’s opening number.
J. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
K. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair
side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and
other public spaces unless approved by Architect.
L. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors,
and stair side of stairway doors.
M. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible
ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect.
1. Coordination: Coordinate provision with the security systems provider to mitigate
excessive or redundant purchase.
2. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve
doors with electrified door hardware.
N. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
O. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present
tripping hazard.
P. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
Q. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
R. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-19
S. Field-verify existing conditions and measurements prior to ordering hardware. Fill existing
hardware cut outs not being used by the new hardware.
T. Remove existing hardware not being reused. Tag and bag removed hardware, turn over to
Owner.
U. Where existing wall conditions will not allow door to swing using the scheduled hinges,
provide wide-throw hinges and if needed, extended arms on closers.
V. Provide manufacturer’s recommended brackets to accommodate the mounting of closers on
doors with flush transoms.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely
from an open position of 30 degrees.
2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage
lock bolt.
3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion,
Installer shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating
forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door
hardware.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide training for Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door
hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following hardware
sets for series, type and function. Refer to the above-specifications for special features,
options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.
B. Do not order material until submittal has been reviewed, stamped, and signed by Architect’s
door hardware consultant.
C. Hardware Sets:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-20
94191 OPT0330252 Version 1
HW SET: 01
Door(s):
101.1 101.2 101.3 101.4 101.5
2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 710 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-3547A-EO 710 VON
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-3547A-NL-OP-388 710 VON
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-001 114 XQ11-949 KA1 613 SCH
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
2 EA DOOR PULL RE-USE EXISTING DOOR PULL B/O
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH
PROVIDE MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ'D
695 LCN
1 SET SEALS BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. B/O
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39D D ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 102A OR AS DETAILED A ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 02
Door(s):
102.1 102.2 102.3 102.4 130.3 130.4
132.2
2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 710 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-3547A-EO 710 VON
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-3547A-NL-OP-388 710 VON
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-001 114 XQ11-949 KA1 613 SCH
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 12" STD 613 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH
PROVIDE MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ'D
695 LCN
1 SET SEALS BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. B/O
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39D D ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 102A OR AS DETAILED A ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-21
HW SET: 03
Door(s):
102A.1
2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 710 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-3547A-EO 710 VON
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-3547A-NL-OP-388 710 VON
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-001 114 XQ11-949 KA1 613 SCH
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 12" STD 613 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 695 LCN
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH
PROVIDE MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ'D
695 LCN
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S/FS18L BLK IVE
1 SET SEALS BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. B/O
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39D D ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 102A OR AS DETAILED A ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 04
Door(s):
118.2 118.3 134.1
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 710 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-35A-NL-OP-388 710 VON
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-001 114 XQ11-949 KA1 613 SCH
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 12" STD 613 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH
PROVIDE MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ'D
695 LCN
1 SET SEALS BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. B/O
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39D D ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 102A OR AS DETAILED A ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-22
HW SET: 05
Door(s):
134A.3
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 710 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-35A-NL-OP-388 710 VON
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-001 114 XQ11-949 KA1 613 SCH
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
1 EA DOOR PULL RE-USE EXISTING DOOR PULL B/O
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA
PROVIDE MTG BRKT, SPCR &
PLATE AS REQ'D
695 LCN
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S/FS18L BLK IVE
1 SET SEALS BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. B/O
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39D D ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 102A OR AS DETAILED A ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 06
Door(s):
148
1 EA SLIDING AUTOMATIC
ENTRANCE,SEE SECTION
084229
SAT
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
HW SET: 07
Door(s):
100
EXISTING SLIDING DOOR TO REMAIN.
HW SET: 08
Door(s):
105
EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-23
HW SET: 09
Door(s):
106.3 107
EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN
HW SET: 10
Door(s):
100A 100B 104 116 136.2 138
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 03A KA1 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 704 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 11
Door(s):
144 146
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 03A KA1 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-24
HW SET: 12
Door(s):
101.6 101.8 128 130.1 130.2
4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-98-L-F-03 710 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
1 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 704 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 12A
Door(s):
118.1
1 EA CONT. HINGE 700CS 710 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-98-L-F-03 710 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
1 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 704 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-25
HW SET: 13
Door(s):
101.7
8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-L-F-LBR-03-499F 710 VON
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-L-F-LBRAFL-03-499F 710 VON
2 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
2 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 695 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV
REQUIRES BACKING @ WALL
613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 SET MEETING STILE 328D-S D ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 14
Door(s):
101.9 101.11
8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-L-F-LBR-03-499F 710 VON
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-L-F-LBRAFL-03-499F 710 VON
2 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
2 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 695 LCN
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 695 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV
REQUIRES BACKING @ WALL
613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 SET MEETING STILE 328D-S D ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-26
HW SET: 15
Door(s):
135.1
8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-L-F-LBR-03-499F 710 VON
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-L-F-LBRAFL-03-499F 710 VON
2 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
2 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 695 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV
REQUIRES BACKING @ WALL
613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 SET MEETING STILE 328D-S D ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 16
Door(s):
101.10
8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-L-F-LBR-03-499F 710 VON
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-L-F-LBRAFL-03-499F 710 VON
2 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 KA1 613 SCH
2 EA RIM CYLINDER CR3000 77 KWY 613 C-R
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 695 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 SET MEETING STILE 328D-S D ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-27
HW SET: 17
Door(s):
106.1 106.2
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 710 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070P 03A KA1 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8402 24" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA MAGNET SEM7800 SERIES 695 LCN
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
FOR OPENING 106.2, RELOCATE (E) MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN TO NEW DOOR.
WIRE MAGNETIC-HOLDER INTO THE SMOKE/FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE
UPON ACTIVATION.
HW SET: 18
Door(s):
106.4
4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 IVE
1 EA CORRIDOR LOCK L9456P6 03A KA1 L583-363 L283-
711
613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH ST-1595 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 SET GASKETING 429D-S D ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39D D ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 102A OR AS DETAILED A ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-28
HW SET: 19
Door(s):
108
2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 710 IVE
1 SET CONST LATCHING BOLT FB51P 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D 626 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 03A KA1 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 711 IVE
1 EA OH STOP 100S 613 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 695 LCN
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP ST-1630 695 LCN
1 EA TOP JAMB MTG PLATE 4040XP-18TJ 695 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 704 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA ASTRAGAL 383D D ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 20
Door(s):
136.1
8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE
1 SET CONST LATCHING BOLT FB51P 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D 626 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 03A KA1 10-072 7/8" LIP 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 711 IVE
2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB BLK IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA ST-1754 695 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
2 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 704 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA ASTRAGAL 383D D ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-29
HW SET: 21
Door(s):
110 112 140 142
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 03A 613 SCH
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC 613 VON
1 EA AUTO OPERATOR &
ACTUATORS
RE-USE EXISTING B/O
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 704 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 22
Door(s):
132.1
4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070P 03A KA1 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA OH STOP 100S 613 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP ST-1630 695 LCN
1 EA TOP JAMB MTG PLATE 4040XP-18TJ 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-30
HW SET: 23
Door(s):
134A.1 134A.2 148A
2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 710 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-EO-F-LBR-499F 710 VON
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE AX-9827-L-BE-F-LBRAFL-03-499F 710 VON
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 695 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
2 EA MAGNET SEM7800 SERIES 695 LCN
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 SET MEETING STILE 328D-S D ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
(E) MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN TO REMAIN.
WIRE MAGNETIC-HOLDER INTO THE SMOKE/FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE
UPON ACTIVATION.
HW SET: 24
Door(s):
152.1 154
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW8 640 IVE
1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092PEU 03A KA1 CON 12/24
VDC
613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 704 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
087100-31
HW SET: 25
Door(s):
152.2
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070P 03A KA1 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 704 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
HW SET: 26
Door(s):
152.3
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA OFFICE/ENTRY LOCK L9050P6 03A L583-363 613 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER CR1000 77 KWY CAM TO SUIT 613 C-R
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 704 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE.
END OF SECTION
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088000 - 1
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass for windows storefront framing.
2. Fire rated borrowed-light assemblies.
3. Glazing sealants and accessories.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face
clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm)
square.
C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria,
including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021
to conduct the testing indicated.
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing
accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088000 - 2
1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and
glazing materials matching those submitted.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that
deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic
seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture,
or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable
product by one of the following:
1. Guardian Glass; SunGuard.
2. Hartung Glass Industries.
3. JE Berkowitz, LP.
4. Northwestern Industries, Inc.
5. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.
6. Pilkington North America.
7. Schott North America, Inc.
8. Tecnoglass.
9. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC.
10. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.
11. Viracon, Inc.
12. Vitro Architectural Glass.
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
1. Obtain insulated glass from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each
product and installation method.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements," to design glazing.
B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions
indicated determined according to the CBC and ASTM E1300.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088000 - 3
1. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within
individual glass lites.
C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category
II.
D. Fire-Rated glass refer to section 088813.
E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated
in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2
computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC
200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.3 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms
not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."
2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for
Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label
of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate
manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite
of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance
requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.
E. Strength:
1. Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or
fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.
2. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully
tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.
3. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088000 - 4
2.5 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless
otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
2.6 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated
interspace, qualified according to ASTM E2190.
1. Sealing System: Dual seals.
2. Perimeter Spacer:
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Glasswerks G3 Super Spacer. Construction complying with the
following requirements:
1) Spacer Material: G3 Tri-Seal Super Spacer.
2) Color: Black unless otherwise indicated.
3) Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
a) Thermoset structural silicone containing no-metal with integral 3A desiccant
molecular sieve not less than 47 percent by weight.
4) PIB primary seal.
5) Silicone, Polyurethane, Polysulfide, DSE/DSA’s, or Hot Melt secondary seal.
6) Pressure-sensitive acrylic adhesive.
7) Pre-applied advanced multi-layer vapor barrier.
b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.
2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass
products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing
sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088000 - 5
1. Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50,
Use NT.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, thefollowing:
1) Dow Corning Corporation.
2) GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
3) May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
4) Sika Corporation.
5) Tremco Incorporated.
2.8 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining
and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by
tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for
products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
B. Setting Blocks:
1. EPDM, silicone, neoprene, or santoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus5.
2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer.
C. Spacers:
1. Neoprene blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass
lites in place for installation indicated.
2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer.
D. Edge Blocks:
1. EPDM, silicone, neoprene, or santoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer.
E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to
control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088000 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing
materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and
legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that,
when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction
testing.
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless
otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing
channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing
publications.
3.2 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude
slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit
opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing
joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes
with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant where indicated and where recommended by manufacturer.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression
gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
corners and work toward centers of openings.
G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape where indicated and where recommended by
manufacturer.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088000 - 7
3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with
allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter
cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly
against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place
against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly
against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying
pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing
bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing
stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking
weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control
depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to
glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass
surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during
construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances
immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot
be cleaned without damage to coatings.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088000 - 8
3.6 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Clear insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.
3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted (color to match existing), heat-strengthened, float glass; provide clear, fully
tempered, float glass where indicated and where required.
4. Interspace Content: Air.
5. Indoor Lite: Clear, heat-strengthened, float glass; provide clear, fully tempered, float glass where
indicated and where required.
6. Provide safety glazing where indicated and where required.
END OF SECTION 088000
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088813 -- 1
SECTION 08 88 13 - FIRE-RATED GLASS – FIRELITE PLUS®
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-rated glazing materials installed as vision lights in fire-rated doors.
2. Fire-rated glazing materials installed as transoms, borrowed lites, windows in fire-rated frames.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 08 11 00 “Metal Doors and Frames” for vision panels in interior doors and interior vision
panel (borrowed lites) frames.
2. Section 08 14 16 “Flush Wood Doors” for vision panels in interior doors.
3. Section 08 14 33 “Stile and Rail Wood Doors” for vision panels in interior doors.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM E2010-01: Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
C. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC):
1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials
D. Glass Association of North America (GANA):
1. GANA – Glazing Manual.
2. FGMA – Sealant Manual.
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows.
2. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. NFPA 257 – Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. UL 9 – Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
2. UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
G. Standard Council of Canada:
1. CAN/ULC-S101 Standard Test of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials
2. CAN/ULC-S104 Standard Method of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
3. CAN/ULC-S106 Standard Method of Fire Tests of Window and Glass Block Assemblies
1.3 DEFINITIONS
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088813 -- 2
A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass, fabricated glass or framing as defined in referenced
glazing publications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 33 00
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each glazing material required, including
installation and maintenance instructions.
C. Certificates of compliance from glass and glazing materials manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing
materials furnished for project comply with requirements. Separate certification will not be required for
glazing materials bearing manufacturer’s permanent label designating type and thickness of glass,
provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or
independent testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.
D. Product Test Listings: From UL indicating fire-rated glass complies with requirements, based on
comprehensive testing of current product.
E. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, approx. 8-inch by 10-inch sample for each type of glass
indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Standards: FGMA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.
B. Fire Protective Rated Glass: Each lite shall bear permanent, non-removable label of UL certifying it for
use in tested and rated fire protective assemblies.
C. Fire Protective Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per UL 10B,
classified and labeled by UL.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle materials under provisions of Section 01 60 00<Insert Section #>.
B. Deliver materials to specified destination in manufacturer or distributor’s packaging, undamaged,
complete with installation instructions.
C. Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's limited warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS- (ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER/PRODUCTS)
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088813 -- 3
A. Manufacturer: FireLite Plus® as manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Company, Ltd., and distributed
by Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 phone (800.426.0279) fax
(425.396.8300) e-mail tgp.sales@allegion.com, web site http://www.fireglass.com
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-rated glass ceramic clear and wireless glazing material listed for use in non-impact safety-rated
locations such as transoms and borrowed lites with fire rating requirements ranging from 20 to 90
minutes with required hose stream test.
B. Passes positive pressure test standards UL 10C.
2.3 MATERIALS-GLASS
A. Properties:
1. Thickness: 5/16 inch [8 mm] overall.
2. Weight: 4 lbs./sq. ft.
3. Approximate Visible Transmission: 85 percent.
4. Approximate Visible Reflection: 9 percent.
5. Fire-rating: 20 minutes to 3 hours for doors; 20 minutes to 90 minutes for other applications.
6. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201 (Cat. I and II).
7. STC Rating: Approximately 38 dB.
8. Surface Finish:
a. Standard Grade is polished for a surface quality that is comparable to alternative fire-rated
ceramics marketed as having a premium finish.
b. Premium Grade is finish ground and polished on both surfaces to provide superior surface
quality, improving overall clarity and providing a surface that is unmatched by alternative
products.
9. Positive Pressure Test: UL 10C; passes.
B. Maximum sheet sizes based on surface finish:
1. Premium: 48 inches by 96 inches.
2. Standard: 48 inches by 96 inches.
C. Labeling: Permanently label each piece of FireLite Plus® with the FireLite Plus® logo, UL logo and fire
rating in sizes up to 3,325 sq. in., and with the FireLite Plus® label only for sizes that exceed the listing
(as approved by the local authority having jurisdiction).
D. Fire Rating: Fire rating classified and labeled by UL for fire rating scheduled at opening locations on
drawings, when tested in accordance with [ASTM E2010-01] [ULC Standards CAN4 S-104 and CAN4
S-106] [NPFA 252 and NFPA 257] [UL 9, UL 10B and UL 10C].
E. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
012500 - Product Requirements.
2.4 GLAZING COMPOUND FOR FIRE-RATED GLAZING MATERIALS
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088813 -- 4
A. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two
sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent. Glass panels that exceed 1,393 sq. inches for
90-minute ratings must be glazed with fire-rated glazing tape supplied by manufacturer.
B. Glazing Compound: DAP 33 putty.
C. Silicone Sealant: One-part neutral curing silicone, medium modulus sealant, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25
with additional movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression (total 100 percent);
Use (Exposure) NT; Uses (Substrates) G, A, and O as applicable. Available Products:
1. Dow Corning 795 - Dow Corning Corp.
2. Silglaze-II 2800 - General Electric Co.
3. Spectrem 2 - Tremco Inc.]
D. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone; tested for compatibility with glazing compound; of 70 to
90 Shore A hardness.
E. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by manufacturer of glass and gaskets.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with
edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners.
2. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
3. Observable edge damage or face imperfections.
B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.2 INSTALLATION (GLAZING)
A. Comply with referenced FGMA standards and instructions of manufacturers of glass, glazing sealants,
and glazing compounds.
B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during installation and
discard pieces with edge damage that could affect glass performance.
C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088813 -- 5
D. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, flush with sight lines to fit openings exactly,
with stretch allowance during installation.
E. Place setting blocks located at quarter points of glass with edge block no more than 6 inches from
corners.
F. Glaze vertically into labeled fire-rated metal frames or partition walls with same fire rating as glass and
push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
G. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
H. Install removable stop and secure without displacement of tape.
I. [Use specified glazing compound, without adulteration; bed glazing material in glazing compound;
entirely fill all recess and spaces. Provide visible glazing compound with smooth and straight edges.]
J. Install in vision panels in fire-rated doors to requirements of NFPA 80.
K. Install so that appropriate [UL] [FireLite Plus®] markings remain permanently visible.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
Remove any such substances by method approved by glass manufacturer.
B. Wash glass on both faces not more than four days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date of substantial completion. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.4 GLAZING SCHEDULE
Rating
Assembly
Max. Exposed
Area (Sq. In.)
Max. Width
Of Exposed
Glazing (In.)
OR
Max. Height
Of Exposed
Glazing (In.)
Stop
Height
20 min. Doors
HMS or Wood*
Fireframes D.S.
Other than doors
HMS or Wood
Fireframes D.S.
3,204
3,204
3,325
3,325
36
36
95
95
89
89
95
95
5/8”
3/4"
5/8”
3/4"
45 min. Doors
HMS or Wood
Fireframes D.S.
Other than doors
HMS or Wood
Fireframes D.S.
3,204
3,204
3,325
3,325
36
36
95
95
89
89
95
95
5/8”
3/4"
5/8”
3/4"
60 min. Doors (non-temp rise)
HMS or Wood
Fireframes D.S.
Doors (temp rise)
Other than doors
HMS or Wood
Fireframes D.S.
3,204
3,204
100
3,325
3,325
36
36
12
95
95
89
89
33
95
95
5/8”
3/4"
5/8”
5/8”
3/4"
90 min. Doors (non-temp rise) 2,034 36 56 ½” 3/4”
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
088813 -- 6
Doors (temp rise)
Other than doors
HMS
Fireframes D.S.
100
2,627
2,627
12
56 ½”
56 ½”
33
56 ½”
56 ½”
1/2”
5/8”
3/4"
3 hours Doors 100 12 33 1/2”
* HMS indicates hollow metal steel framing. Fireframes D.S. indicates Designer Series narrow profile framing.
For wood frames, check with manufacturer for maximum tested glass sizes.
END OF SECTION
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092216 - 1
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Evaluation reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are
certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel
Framing Industry Association, or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings and soffits shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-
bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated,
according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency.
C. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM
E413 by an independent testing agency.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092216 - 2
2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All insulation provided for use on this project shall be identified as required by Section 12-13-1557 of the
California Referenced Standards Code (Part 12, Title 24, C.C.R.); Chapter 12-13 "Standards For
Insulating Material", (See Part 6, Title 24, C.C.R.); Department Of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of Home
Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; Article 3: "Standards for Insulating Material".
2.3 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
2.4 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for steel unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A653/A653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. Use either conventional steel studs and tracks or embossed, high-
strength steel studs and tracks.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
b. Custom Stud.
c. MBA Building Supplies.
d. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
e. Phillips Manufacturing Co.
f. Telling Industries.
2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C645 top track with 2 inch (51 mm) deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with
continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
2. Double-Track System: ASTM C645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2 inch (51 mm) deep flanges
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to
friction-fit over inner track.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to
interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than
indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co
2) ClarkDietrich.
3) MBA Building Supplies.
4) Metal-Lite.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092216 - 3
5) Perfect Wall, Inc.
6) Telling Industries.
D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement
of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less
than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
b. ClarkDietrich.
c. Fire Trak Corp.
d. Metal-Lite.
e. Perfect Wall, Inc.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ClarkDietrich.
b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings but not less than 0.0329 inch (0.836
mm) (20 gage nominal).
F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, with not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide flanges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ClarkDietrich.
b. MarinoWARE.
c. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
d. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
e. Steel Construction Systems.
2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings but not less than 0.0538 inch (1.367
mm) (16 gage nominal).
3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), galvanized steel.
a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings but not less than 0.0677 inch
(1.720 mm) (14 gage nominal).
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other
properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092216 - 4
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration
without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud .
C. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing
installation.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab
bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame
both sides of joints independently.
3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings
required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls,
install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or
substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended
ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce
joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track
section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092216 - 5
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm)
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door
openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing
required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid
structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
END OF SECTION 092216
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
09 24 00 - 1
SECTION 092400 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Supply and Installation of LaHabra FastWall® 100 Stucco Assemblies
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 16 00 - Sheathing
B. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers
C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
D. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection
E. Section 08 50 00 - Windows
F. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
B. ASTM C578 - Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
C. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath
D. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plaster
E. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster
F. ASTM C933 - Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath
G. ASTM C1032 - Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base
H. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Based
Plaster
I. ASTM C1177 - Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing
J. ASTM C1278 - Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel
K. ASTM C1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board
L. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
M. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
N. ASTM E330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
Uniform Static air Pressure Difference
O. ASTM G153 - Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
Nonmetallic Materials
P. ICC Acceptance Criteria 219 - Acceptance Criteria for Exterior Insulation And Finish Systems
Q. ICC Acceptance Criteria 11 - Acceptance Criteria for Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings
1.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. LaHabra FastWall 100 Stucco Assembly: A code complying water resistive barrier, wire fabric or metal
lath, Fastwall Stucco Base (Fastwall Stucco Base Concentrate or Fastwall Stucco Base Sanded) and
an acrylic or elastomeric based finish coat.
-OR-
A. LaHabra FastWall 100 Krak-Shield™ Stucco Assembly: A code complying water resistive barrier, wire
fabric or metal lath, Fastwall Stucco Base (Fastwall Stucco Base Concentrate or Fastwall Stucco Base
Sanded), Parex USA reinforcing mesh embedded in Parex USA Stucco Level Coat, and an acrylic or
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
09 24 00 - 2
elastomeric based finish coat.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit Samples, Evaluation Reports and manufacturers product datasheets in accordance
with Division 1 General Requirements Submittal Section.
B. Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and of suitable size as
required to accurately represent each color and texture used on project. Prepare each sample using
same tools and techniques for actual project application. Maintain and make available, at job site,
approved samples.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit sample copies of Manufacturer's Warranty indicating Single Source
Responsibility for Water Stucco Base coat, finish coat and optional Primer, level coat and reinforcing
mesh as specified.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: Shall have marketed stucco assemblies in United States for at least five years and
shall have completed projects of same general scope and complexity.
2. Applicator: Shall be experienced and competent in installation of stucco materials, and shall
provide evidence of a minimum of 5 years experience in work similar to that required by this
section.
B. LaHabra FastWall 100 Stucco Functional Criteria:
1. General: Stucco application shall be to vertical substrates or to substrates sloped for positive
drainage. Substrates sloped for drainage shall have additional protection from weather exposure
that might be harmful to coating performance.
2. Testing to meet International Code Council Acceptance Criteria AC11
3. Performance Requirements
Fastwall Method ICC AC 11 Criteria Results
Accelerated Weathering ASTM G153 2000 Hours No deleterious effect
Freeze-Thaw Resistance ICC AC 11 10 cycles Pass
Transverse Wind Load
Resistance
ASTM E330 Meet Design Loads Refer to ICC-ES ESR-
2564
Fire Resistance ASTM E119
One hour fire Refer to ICC-ES ESR-
2564
Drainage ICC AC 11 90% Refer to ICC-ES ESR-
2564
Acrylic Finish Method ICC or ASTM Criteria Results
Accelerated Weathering ASTM G153
(ASTM G 23)
ASTM G154
No deleterious effects at 2000
hours when viewed under 5x
magnification
2000 Hours: no
deleterious effect
Freeze/Thaw Resistance ASTM E2485 No deleterious effects at 10
cycles when viewed under 5x
magnification
60 cycles: no deleterious
effect
Fungus Resistance
MIL STD 810B No Requirement 28 days: no growth
Mildew Resistance ASTM D3273 No growth supported during 28
day exposure period
Pass
Moisture Resistance ASTM D2247 No deleterious effects at 14
day exposure
Pass
Salt Fog Resistance ASTM B117 No deleterious effects at 300
hours
500 hours: no
deterioration
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
09 24 00 - 3
C. Substrate Conditions:
1. Substrate materials and construction shall conform to the building code having jurisdiction.
2. Substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence and other harmful
contaminants.
3. Substrate Dimensional Tolerances: Flat with ¼ in (6.4 mm) within any 4 ft (1.22 m) radius.
4. Maximum deflection of substrate system under positive or negative design loads shall not exceed
L/360 of span.
D. Expansion and Control Joints: Continuous expansion and control joints shall be installed at locations in
accordance with ASTM C1063 and ASTM C926.
1. Substrate movement, and expansion and contraction of LaHabra FastWall 100 Stucco and
adjacent materials shall be taken into account in design of expansion joints, with proper
consideration given to sealant properties, installation conditions, temperature range, coefficients
of expansion of materials, joint width to depth ratios, and other material factors. Minimum width of
expansion joints shall be as specified by the designer or shown on the project drawings.
2. In accordance with ASTM C1063, expansion or control joints shall be installed in walls not more
than 144 ft² (13.4 m²) in area, and not more than 100 ft² (9.3 m²) in area for all non-vertical
applications. The distance between joints shall not exceed 18 ft (5.5 m) in either direction or a
length-to-width ratio of 2-½ to 1.
3. For direct appliaction to concrete or masonry, stucco joints are requried only at control/expansion
joints in the underlaying concrete or masonry
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver LaHabra FastWall 100 Stucco Assembly products in original packaging with
manufacturer's identification.
B. Storage: Store LaHabra FastWall 100 Stucco Assembly products in a dry location, out of direct sunlight,
off the ground, and protected from moisture.
1.5 SITE / ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Substrate Temperature: Do not apply LaHabra products to substrates whose temperature are below
40°F (4.4°C) or contain frost or ice.
B. Inclement Weather: Do not apply LaHabra products during inclement weather, unless appropriate
protection is employed.
C. Sunlight Exposure: Avoid, when possible, installation of the LaHabra products in direct sunlight.
Application of LaHabra Finishes in direct sunlight in hot weather may adversely affect aesthetics.
D. Do not apply stucco base coats or finishes if ambient temperature falls below 40ºF (4ºC) within 24
hours of application. Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during dry weather and
strong blasts of dry air.
E. Prior to installation, the wall shall be inspected for surface contamination, or other conditions that may
adversely affect the performance of the LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco Assembly, and shall be free of
residual moisture.
1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING:
A. Coordination: Coordinate LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco Assembly installation with other construction
operations.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Upon request, at completion of installation, provide Standard Limited LaHabra Fastwall 100
Stucco Assembly Warranty.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
09 24 00 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Parex USA, Inc., 4125 E. La Palma Ave., Suite 250, Anaheim, CA 92807
B. Components: Obtain components manufactured by Parex USA of LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco
Assembly from authorized distributors. No substitutions or additions of other materials are permitted
without prior written permission from Parex USA for this project.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco Assembly Materials:
1. LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco Base (⅜ in – ½ in)
a. LaHabra Fastwall Stucco Base Concentrate: Proprietary mixture of portland cement, and
proprietary ingredients mixed with clean, cool, potable water, and ASTM C897 or ASTM
C144 sand added in the field.
B. LaHabra Acryic Bonder & Admix: 100% acrylic admix emulsion for portland cement based products, to
enhance curing, adhesion, freeze-thaw resistance and workability.
C. Leveling and Reinforcing Coat (Required for LaHabra Fastwall 100 Krak-Shield Stucco Assembly):
*NOT FOR USE ON EPS FOAM SHAPES
1. Parex USA Stucco Level Coat™: Copolymer based, factory blend of cement and proprietary
ingredients requiring addition of water.
2. Parex USA 355 Standard Mesh: Weight 4.5 oz/yd2 (153 g/m2) reinforcing mesh.
D. LaHabra Perma-Primer: 100% acrylic based coating to prepare surfaces for LaHabra finishes.
E. LaHabra Finish:
1. Perma-Elastic Elastomeric Finish: Factory blended, 100 % acrylic polymer based elastomeric
textured finish, integrally colored.
a. Finish texture and color as selected by Project Designer
2.3 RELATED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco Assembly and its related materials shall conform to the
requirements of ICC-ES Evaluation Report No. 2564 and shall conform to this specification.
B. Substrate Materials:
1. Gypsum Sheathing: Minimum ½ in (13 mm) thick, core-treated, weather-resistant, exterior gypsum
sheathing complying with ASTM C79 or ASTM C1177.
2. Cement Board Sheathing, Minimum ½ in (13 mm) thick, conforming to ASTM C1186.
3. Fiberboard: Minimum ½ in (13 mm) thick fiberboard complying with ANSI/AHA A194.1 as a
regular density sheathing.
4. Plywood: Minimum 5/16 in (8 mm) thick exterior grade or Exposure I plywood for studs spaced 16 in
(406 mm) o.c. and ⅜ in (9.5 mm) thick exterior type plywood minimum for studs spaced 24 in (610
mm) o.c. Plywood shall comply be exterior grade or Exposure 1 and comply with DOC PS-1
5. Oriented Strand Board (OSB): 7/16 - ½ in Wall-16 or Wall-24, approved by the APA, TECO, or
PSI/PTL. Stamped as Exposure 1 or Exterior Sheathing with a PS2 or PRP-108 rating. The
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
09 24 00 - 5
system is qualified for application to OSB (oriented strand board) sheathing only in areas shown in
the Parex USA “Acceptable Substrates and Areas of Use” Technical Bulletin.
6. Concrete Masonry Construction: Painted (coated) and non-painted (uncoated). Shall be in
conformance with the building code.
7. Other Approved by Parex USA in writing prior to the project
C. Water Resistive Barriers:
1. For non-wood based sheathing shall be either:
a. 1 layer asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226 Type I.
b. Lath with appropriate paper backing
c. Other recognized equivalent
2. For wood based sheathing shall be either:
a. 2 layers of Grade D asphalt saturated Kraft building paper, or 1 layer of the Kraft building
paper plus paper backed lath
b. Grade D paper with a water resistance equal to or greater than 60 minutes, with an
intervening nonwater-absorbing layer or drainage space.
c. Other recognized equivalent
3. Open Framing:
a. 1 layer Grade D asphalt saturated Kraft building paper.
b. 1 layer asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226 Type I.
c. Other recognized equivalent
D. Lath and Accessories: Conform to ASTM C847, ASTM C933, ASTM C1032, ASTM C1063 and
Appendix
1. Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard steel products with minimum G60 galvanizing unless
otherwise indicated as rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC plastic) or zinc alloy
2. Metal Plaster Bases: Minimum 17 gauge self-furred stucco netting, minimum 2.5 lb/yd2 (1.4 kg/m2)
or 3.4 lb/yd2 (1.8 kg/m2) expanded metal diamond lath, or welded wire lath in accordance with
applicable codes and standards.
3. Weep Screeds: Foundation weep screed with minimum 3-½ inch vertical attachment flange.
E. Expanded Polystyrene Features over LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco
1. Adhesive and Base Coat
a. LaHabra Polybond: Modified portland cement adhesive and basecoat for exterior foam
shapes, such as pop-outs, plant-ons, cornices and reveals mixed with water.
2. Insulation Board
a. Produced and labeled under a third party quality program as required by applicable building
code and produced by a manufacturer approved by Parex USA.
b. Shall conform to ASTM C578, ASTM E2430 Type I, and the Parex USA specification for
Molded Expanded Polystyrene Insulation board.
3. Reinforcing Mesh
a. Parex USA Standard Mesh: Weight 4.5 oz/yd2 (153 g/m2) reinforcing mesh.
F. Seals, Sealants and Bond Breakers: Sealants shall conform to ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Use
NT. Backer rod shall be closed-cell polyethylene foam.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
09 24 00 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
B. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco
Assembly products.
C. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to LaHabra Fastwall Stucco Base installation as follows:
1. Substrate shall be of a type approved by Parex USA. Plywood and OSB substrates shall be
gapped ⅛ in (3.2 mm) at all edges.
2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and other harmful conditions.
3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants.
4. Substrate construction in accordance with substrate material manufacturer's specifications and
applicable building codes.
D. Advise Contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco
Assembly. Do not proceed with the LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco Assembly work until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
E. Ensure that flashing has been installed per Specification Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Water Resistive Barrier:
1. The Water Resistive Barrier is placed over all substrates except concrete or unpainted masonry.
Painted (coated) CMU is to use a bond breaker such as asphalt paper and lath if the paint or
coating cannot be removed.
2. Installed according to manufacturers instructions.
IMPORTANT: COORDINATE TERMINATIONS OF STUCCO ACCESSORIES WITH SEALANT SECTION OF THE
SPECIFICATION IN ORDER TO LEAVE REQUIRED SPACINGS FOR SPECIFIED JOINT DIMENSIONS.
B. Wire Fabric Lath and Metal Lath: Install according to ICC Evaluation Report ESR 2564, ASTM C1063
and Appendix and the Building Code.
C. Concrete (Cast-in-Place): Provide a surface that is slightly scarified, water absorbent, straight and true
to line and plane. Remove form ties and trim projecting concrete so it is even with the plane of the wall.
Remove form release agents.
D. Concrete Masonry Units: Remove projecting joint mortar so it is even with the plane of the wall. Remove
surface contaminants such as efflorescence, existing paint or any other bond inhibiting material by
sandblasting, waterblasting, wire brushing, chipping or other appropriate means. Pre-moisten the
surface with water just prior to placement of stucco, or apply LaHabra Acrylic Bonder & Admix.
3.3 MIXING
A. Mix LaHabra proprietary products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including the
applicable LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco Assembly Product Data Sheets.
B. Admix - LaHabra Acrylic Bonder & Admix
Mix up to 1 gal (3.8 L) per 1 bag of LaHabra Fastwall Stucco Concentrate. Mix up to 1 qt (1 L) per bag
of LaHabra Fastwall Sanded. Add after dry components and the majority of the water has been mixed.
Mix no longer than required to provide a uniform mixture. DO NOT OVER-MIX. Overmixing entrains
excessive amounts of air which weaken the material. Do not re-temper mixes over 20 minutes old.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. General: LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco Assembly and its related materials shall conform to the
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
09 24 00 - 7
requirements of ICC-ES Evaluation Report No. 2564 and shall conform to this specification.
B. Bonding Agent - LaHabra Acrylic Bonder & Admix
1. Apply at an approximate rate of 250 ft2 per gallon using a low-pressure sprayer, brush or roller.
(application in direct sunlight may cause the product to dry too quickly)
C. LaHabra Fastwall Stucco Base:
1. Either LaHabra Fastwall Stucco mixtures shall be applied in one or two coats to a minimum
thickness of ⅜ in (9.5 mm) by hand troweling or machine spraying the mixture to the wire lath in
accordance with LaHabra Fastwall Stucco Product Data Sheets. The maximum thickness applied
in one pass is ½ in (12.7 mm).
2. Rod surface to true plane and float to densify.
3. Trowel to smooth and uniform surface to receive acrylic polymer finish coat.
EDITOR NOTE: MODIFY BELOW TO SUIT REQUIREMENTS. CHOOSE LAHABRA FASTWALL LEVELING AND
REINFORCING COAT FOR ENHANCED CRACK RESISTANCE PERFORMANCE (D.) FOR ENHANCED CRACK
RESISTANCE PERFORMANCE.
D. Leveling and Reinforcing Coat (LaHabra Fastwall 100 Krak-Shield Stucco Assembly):
1. After Moist Curing, allow LaHabra Fastwall Stucco Base to air dry a minimum of 24 hours before
applying the leveling and reinforcing coat.
2. Using a stainless steel trowel, apply the LaHabra Stucco Level Coat over the LaHabra Fastwall
Stucco Base at a thickness of 1/16 – 3/32 in. (1.6 – 2.4 mm).
3. Fully embed the Parex USA Standard Mesh into the wet Stucco Level Coat including diagonal
strips at corners of openings and trowel smooth. If Standard Mesh is used, seams are overlapped
2½ in (63 mm).
4. The LaHabra acrylic primer and finishes can be applied as soon as the LaHabra Stucco Level
Coat has cured, typically within 24 hours.
E. Expanded Polystyrene Featured over LaHabra Fastwall Stucco Base:
1. Install back-wrap mesh at EPS terminations.
2. Apply LaHabra adhesive to backs of insulation boards with a notched trowel. Allow to dry a
minimum of 12 hours.
3. Apply LaHabra Base coat to the entire foam shape and pull the backwrap mesh around the foam
shapes and fully embed it into the base coat.
4. Immediately embed the reinforcing mesh in the wet LaHabra Base coat.
F. LaHabra Primer and Finish:
1. Remove surface contaminants such as dust or dirt without damaging the substrate.
2. Ambient and surface temperature must be 40°F (4°C) or higher during application and drying time.
Supplemental heat and protection from precipitation must be provided as needed.
3. Use only on surfaces that are sound, clean, dry, unpainted, and free from any residue that might
affect the ability of the finish to bond to the surface.
EDITOR NOTE: MODIFY BELOW TO SUIT REQUIREMENTS. CHOOSE ONE #4
4. LaHabra FastWall 100 Krak-Shield Stucco Assembly
a. Before the application of the finish, the base coat must have cured a minimum of 24 hours or
longer as required by weather conditions. Examine the cured base coat for any irregularities.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
09 24 00 - 8
b. Correct these irregularities to produce a flat surface.
-OR-
4. LaHabra FastWall 100 Stucco Assembly
a. After Moist curing, allow the LaHabra FastWall Stucco Base to air dry.
(1) Minimum of 3 additional days if applying a Primer
-OR-
(1) Minimum of 5 additional days before application of an Acrylic or Elastomeric based
Finish Coat
5. Protect LaHabra Finish Coats from inclement weather until completely dry.
G. Curing:
1. LaHabra Fastwall Stucco Base: Keep stucco moist for at least 48 hours (longer in dry weather) by
lightly fogging walls. Start light fogging after initial set of 1–2 hours.
2. Air dry acrylic based and elastomeric finish coats only, do not wet cure.
3.5 CLEAN-UP
A. Removal: Remove and legally dispose of LaHabra Fastwall 100 Stucco component debris material from
job site.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them.
B. Provide protection of installed stucco from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing during installation.
C. Provide protection of installed finish from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing, and continuous high humidity
until fully dry.
D. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the
material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be cleaned to the satisfaction
of the Designer/Owner.
END OF SECTION
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092900 - 1
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1
. SUMMARY
A
.
Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
1
.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A
.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1
.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A
.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
1. Gypsum panels installed in areas that are not enclosed and conditioned shall
have fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and manufacturer's 12 month
exposure warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials
and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119
by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified
according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.
1. Exterior Wall STC Rating: Not less than 50 unless otherwise indicated.
2. Interior Wall STC Rating: Not less than 40 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All insulation provided for use on this project shall be identified as required by Section 12-
13-1557 of the California Referenced Standards Code (Part 12, Title 24, C.C.R.); Chapter
12-13 "Standards For Insulating Material", (See Part 6, Title 24, C.C.R.); Department Of
Consumer Affairs, Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; Article 3:
"Standards for Insulating Material".
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092900 - 2
2.3 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
2.4
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.5
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C1396/C1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. American Gypsum.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
c. Continental Building Products, LLC.
d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
e. National Gypsum Company.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
B. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant
core and paper surfaces.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. American Gypsum.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
c. CertainTeed Gypsum.
d. Continental Building Products, LLC.
e. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
f. National Gypsum Company.
g. PABCO Gypsum.
h. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.
2.6
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092900 - 3
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint
compound.
e. Expansion (control) joint.
2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,
and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members
from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass,
slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092900 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A. Comply with ASTM C840.
B. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6.4 to 12.7 mm) wide spaces at these locations
and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
C. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated
as not intended to receive tape.
G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated on
Drawings.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for plastic paneling, and where indicated on
Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
3. Level 3: At panel surfaces that will not be exposed to view such as those in
mechanical and electrical rooms and where indicated on Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
092900 - 5
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 092900
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
ICG-HB-C2002
099113 - 1 Project Specifications
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Revised
5/19/2021
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior
substrates.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition
to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Flat: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D
523.
B. Velvet: 5 to 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 15 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D
523.
C. Eggshell: 10 to 15 units at 60 degrees and 15 to 30 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM
D 523.
D. Low-Luster (Low-Sheen): 20 to 25 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85
degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Semigloss: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Full Gloss (Gloss): More than 75 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
a. VOC Content: Include VOC content for each product.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1.4 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected
to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of not less than 50 sq. ft.
(4.6 sq. m).
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
ICG-HB-C2002
099113 - 2 Project Specifications
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Revised
5/19/2021
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups
of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Behr Process Corporation (Behr).
2. Dunn-Edwards Corporation (Dunn-Edwards).
3. PPG Paints (PPG)
4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) (Sherwin-Williams).
5. Vista Paint (Vista).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles for the paint category indicated.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
2.2 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
2.3 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated
by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by
topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
ICG-HB-C2002
099113 - 3 Project Specifications
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Revised
5/19/2021
2.4 PRETREATMENT FOR GALVANIZED METAL
A. Galvanized Metal Pretreatment: Factory-formulated galvanized metal pretreatment for
exterior and interior application.
1. Behr: Krud Kutter; Metal Clean & Etch.
2. Dunn-Edwards: Supreme Chemical; Metal Clean and Etch (SCME-01).
3. PPG: Duraprep Concentrated Multi-Purpose Cleaner Prep120.
4. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Wash Primer B71Y1.
5. Vista: Krud Kutter; Metal Clean & Etch.
2
.
5
METAL PRIMERS
A
.
Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior
application.
1. Behr: Premium Plus Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer (436): Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.0457 mm).
2. Dunn-Edwards: BLOC-RUST Premium (BRPR00): Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 2.0 mils (0.0508 mm).
3. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus DTM Industrial Primer 4020: Applied at a dry film
thickness between 2.0 and 4.0 mils (0.0508 and 0.1016 mm).
4. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Primer, B66-310 Series: Applied at a dry
film thickness between 2.0 and 4.0 mils (0.0508 and 0.1016 mm).
5. Vista: 9600 Protec Metal Prime: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0
mils (0.0508 mm).
B
.
Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior
application.
1. Behr: Premium Plus Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer (436): Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.0457 mm).
2. Dunn-Edwards: Provide one of the following:
a. ULTRASHIELD Galvanized Metal Primer (ULGM00): Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.0508 mm).
b. ULTRA-GRIP Premium Interior/Exterior Multi-Surface Primer UGPR00:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.0508 mm).
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
ICG-HB-C2002
099113 - 4 Project Specifications
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Revised
5/19/2021
3. PPG: Provide one of the following:
a. Pitt-Tech Plus DTM Industrial Primer 4020: Applied at a dry film
thickness between 2.0 and 4.0 mils (0.0508 and 0.1016 mm).
b. Seal Grip Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.0406 mm).
4. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Primer, B66-310 Series: Applied at a
dry film thickness between 2.0 and 4.0 mils (0.0508 and 0.1016 mm).
5. Vista: 4800 Metal Pro Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness between 1.2
and 2.5 mils (0.0305 and 0.0635 mm).
2.6 WATER-BASED PAINTS
A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior
application. Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
1. Behr: Premium Plus Exterior Flat (4050): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm).
2. Dunn-Edwards: SPARTASHIELD (SSHL10): Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm).
3. PPG: Speedhide Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex Flat 6-610XI: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm).
4. Sherwin-Williams: A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.0356 mm).
5. Vista: 2800 Acriglo Flat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.0432 mm).
B. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex
enamel for exterior application. 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1. Behr: Premium Plus Exterior Semi-Gloss (5050): Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.4 mils (0.0356 mm).
2. Dunn-Edwards: SPARTASHIELD (SSHL50): Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm).
3. PPG: Speedhide Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss 6900 Series: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.0356 mm).
4. Sherwin-Williams: Provide one of the following:
a. Sonoran Int/Ext Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss, B40WJ9850 Series: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm).
b. Solo 100% Acrylic Int/Ext S/G A76 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm).
5. Vista: 7000 Acriglo Semigloss: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.0406
mm).
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
ICG-HB-C2002
099113 - 5 Project Specifications
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Revised
5/19/2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture
meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to
substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove door and other hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that
are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of size or weight of item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
ICG-HB-C2002
099113 - 6 Project Specifications
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Revised
5/19/2021
3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Cement Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over cement plaster substrates:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior plaster primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.
B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal surfaces:
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Pretreatment: Exterior galvanized metal pretreatment. Required even if not recommended.
b. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
c. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
END OF SECTION 099113
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
099123 - 1
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior
substrates.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition
to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Flat: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D
523.
B. Velvet: 5 to 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 15 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D
523.
C. Eggshell: 10 to 15 units at 60 degrees and 15 to 30 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM
D 523.
D. Low-Luster (Low-Sheen): 20 to 25 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85
degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Semigloss: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Full Gloss (Gloss): More than 75 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
a. VOC Content: Include VOC content for each product.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of
topcoat.
1.4 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected
to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
099123 - 2
each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 50 sq. ft. ( sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups
of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Behr Process Corporation (Behr).
2. Dunn-Edwards Corporation (Dunn-Edwards).
3. PPG Paints (PPG)
4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) (Sherwin-Williams).
5. Vista Paint (Vista).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles for the paint category indicated.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
2.2 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions in the CGBC.
2.3 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated
by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by
topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
099123 - 3
2.4 PRETREATMENT FOR GALVANIZED METAL
A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior
application.
1. Behr: Premium Plus Interior Drywall Primer Sealer (73): Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.0356 mm).
2. Dunn-Edwards: VINYLASTIC Premium (VNPR00): Applied at a dry film thickness
of not less than 2.0 mils (0.0508 mm).
3. PPG: Speedhide Interior Max Prime Latex Primer Surfacer 6-4: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.0 mils (0.0254 mm).
4. Sherwin-Williams: ProMar 200 Zero Interior Latex Primer, B28W8600: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm).
5. Vista: 5001V Pro 5000 Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2
mils (0.0305 mm).
2.5 METAL PRIMERS
A. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive metal
primer.
1. Behr: Premium Plus Interior / Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer (436):
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.0457 mm).
2. Dunn-Edwards: BLOC-RUST Premium (BRPR00): Applied at a dry film thickness
of not less than 2.0 mils (0.0508 mm).
3. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus DTM Industrial Primer 4020: Applied at a dry film
thickness between 2.0 and 4.0 mils (0.0508 and 0.1016 mm).
4. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series:
Applied at a dry film thickness between 2.0 and 4.0 mils (0.0508 and 0.1016 mm
5. Vista: 9600 Protec Metal Prime: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils
(0.0508 mm).
2.6 WATER-BASED PAINTS
A. Interior Low-Luster (Low-Sheen) Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated low-luster (low-
sheen) acrylic-latex interior enamel. 20 to 25 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35
units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1. Behr: Premium Plus Interior Satin Enamel (7050): Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.0356 mm).
2. Dunn-Edwards: SPARTAWALL Interior Low Sheen Paint (SWLL40): Applied
at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm).
3. PPG: Ultra Hide 150 #1433 Interior Latex Low Luster: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.0330 mm).
4. Sherwin-Williams: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Low Sheen, B24-2600 Series: Applied
at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.0406 mm).
5. Vista: 1750 Acriglo Velvasheen: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than
1.2 mils (0.0305 mm).
B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for
interior application. 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
099123 - 4
1. Behr: Premium Plus Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel (3050): Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.0356 mm).
2. Dunn-Edwards: SPARTAWALL Interior Semi-Gloss Paint (SWLL50): Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm).
3. PPG: Speedhide Interior Zero VOC Semi-Gloss Latex 6-4510XI: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.0356 mm).
4. Sherwin-Williams: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 Series: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.0406 mm).
5. Vista: 5400 V-PRO 5000 Semi-Gloss: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than
1.8 mils (0.0457 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture
meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Wood: 15 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to
substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove door and other hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size
or weight of item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
099123 - 5
lines and color breaks.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Tilt-Up Concrete: Provide the following finish systems over exterior tilt-up concrete substrates:
1. Low-Luster (Low-Sheen) Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior tilt-up concrete primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster (low-sheen) acrylic paint.
2. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior tilt-up concrete primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Low-Luster (Low-Sheen) Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster (low-sheen) acrylic enamel.
2. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
C. Wood, Plywood, and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood
surfaces:
1. Low-Luster (Low-Sheen) Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster (low-sheen) acrylic enamel.
2. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Low-Luster (Low-Sheen) Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
099123 - 6
a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster (low-sheen) acrylic enamel.
2. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
E. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces:
1. Low-Luster (Low-Sheen) Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Pretreatment: Interior zinc-coated metal pretreatment. Required even if not
recommended.
b. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
c. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster (low-sheen) acrylic enamel.
2. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Pretreatment: Interior zinc-coated metal pretreatment. Required even if not
recommended.
b. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
c. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
END OF SECTION 099123
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
260000 - 1
SECTION 260000 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing and installing all l, materials,
equipment, fixtures and performing all labor and operations for complete and operable
systems.
B. Provide all new materials, unless noted otherwise, of the best quality, and in perfect
condition, and materials of the same make and quality throughout the work and as
hereinafter specified. Comply with the requirements of ASTM, NEMA, U.L., and NBFM for
materials and equipment.
C. The intent of these specifications is to establish a standard of quality of materials installed.
Include materials as specified without exception in the Base Bid. Submit for approval any
proposed substitution, complete descriptive, technical, and cost comparison data and test
reports. Do not furnish or install any substitute items without written approval at the time of
contract signing. Reimburse the Owner for any additional engineering charges and for any
changes in the work of other trades resulting from substitutions. List proposed substitutions
on the Bid Form, stating the reasons for substitution. When requested by the Architect or
Electrical Engineer, samples, electrically wired at 120V. with plug, or system demonstrations
of both specified and proposed items will be submitted for inspection at the Electrical
Engineer’s office and at a time convenient to all concerned parties.
D. Where a substitution alters the design or space requirements indicated on the plans,
Contractor is responsible for all additional cost for Engineering to revise plans.
E. Verifying Drawings and Job Conditions:
1. Examine all drawings and specifications in a manner to be fully familiar of all work
required.
2. Visit the site and verify existing conditions. Where existing conditions differ from
drawings, make adjustments and allowances for all necessary equipment to
complete all parts of the drawings and specifications.
F. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit drawings in six sets accompanied by letter of transmittal listing the number
and dates of the drawings submitted.
2. Mark the drawings submitted with the name of the project, numbered consecutively,
and bearing approval as evidence that the drawings have been checked. Any
drawings submitted without this approval will be returned for resubmission.
3. Submit Shop drawings on, but not limited to, the following:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
260000 - 2
a. Light Fixtures
b. Lighting control system
c. Product List
G. Drawings of Record:
Provide and keep up-to-date, a complete record set of blue line prints. Show every change
from the original drawings. Keep this set of prints on the job site, and use only as a record
set. Do not make changes in the layout without definite instruction in each case. Obtain a
set of Contract Drawings from Architect and incorporate all changes as noted on the record
set of prints. Deliver this set to the Architect upon completion and acceptance of work.
H. Accuracy of Plans and Specifications:
Plans and/or specifications showing deviation from standard practice methods or from
compliance with codes, and/or any omissions, does not relieve the responsibility of
furnishing, making or installing all items required by code and/or intended for the function of
the system.
I. Permits, Fees and Insurance:
Obtain and pay for all insurance, permits, etc. necessary for this Contract.
J. Codes and Regulations:
All work performed under this Section of the Specifications complies with the rules and
regulations of the Division of Industrial Safety, State of California, as set forth in the latest
edition of the Electrical Safety Orders, the National Electrical Code, NFPA, and all rules and
regulations of local codes having jurisdiction, including the presently adopted edition Title 21
and 24 California Administrative Code.
K. Testing and Adjustment:
Test all circuits, outlets, switches, lights, motors, circuit breakers and any other electrical
equipment, upon completion of all electrical work.
L. Guarantees of Materials and Workmanship:
Furnish and install all materials under this Contract, new and free from all defects, and
guaranteed for a period of two years from the date of acceptance of the work. Should any
trouble develop during this period due to defective material or faulty workmanship, furnish all
necessary labor and materials to correct the trouble without additional cost to the Contract.
Correct any defective material or inferior workmanship noticed at the time of installation
immediately, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
M. Removal of Rubbish:
Remove rubbish, excess materials, tools or equipment related to this portion of the work,
frequently during construction and upon completion of the work.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
260000 - 3
N. Drawings and Specifications:
1. The lighting drawings are considered as part of these specifications, and any work
or materials shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice
versa, shall be as if specifically mentioned in both.
2. The data herein specified and shown on the drawings is as exact as could be
prepared, but their extreme accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings and
specifications are for assistance and guidance. The installation is essentially as
shown and specified. The exact location of the equipment, material, apparatus and
devices as well as the distances and levels, are more or less governed by the
physical conditions and arrangements of the building. Accept this Contract with this
understanding.
3. Make minor changes, when ordered by the Architect, accommodating the
installation of the work with other sections of the Contract without additional cost to
the Contract.
O. Safety Conditions:
It is the Contractor's responsibility to prevent any damages to personnel and/or property
resulting from contact with new or existing energized circuits, switches, circuit breakers, or
other electrical apparatus. All electrical work to be constructed with electrical systems de-
energized in the area of work.
P. Final Inspection and Acceptance:
After all requirements of the specifications and drawings have been fully completed, a
representative of the Owner will inspect the work. Provide competent personnel to
demonstrate the operation of any item or system involved to the complete satisfaction of
each representative.
2. PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES:
Furnish, install and connect lighting fixtures of type designed on the plans.
A. Verify all fixture locations with Architectural drawings prior to rough in.
B. Where there is conflict in fixture quantities on any of the plans the greatest amount will
prevail. The description of the lighting fixture supersedes the catalog number and is to be fur-
nished and installed with type to fit description.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
260000 - 4
2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS:
A. Rigid Conduit (RGS): Hot dipped galvanized or sherardized steel. Republic Steel Co. or
approved equal. Intermediate metal conduit may be used, where CEC allows, in lieu of RGS.
B. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Welded, electro-galvanized thin wall steel tubing. All
couplings are gland compression type.
C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized steel with exterior,
molded polyvinyl jacket. Use for all final connections to all vibrating equipment, transformers
and the like. 18" maximum. Provide a code sized ground wire.
D. Flexible metallic steel tubing: Liquid tight without a nonmetallic jacket. Use as allowed by
code and where permitted by this Specification, section 3.06.C. Provide a code sized ground
conductor.
E. Condulet Type Fittings: As manufactured by Crouse Hinds Company, Appleton Electric
Company or Pyle National or approved equal, smooth inside and out, taper threaded with
integral bushings.
2.3 CONDUCTORS:
A. Provide copper conductors, 600 volt A.C. unless noted otherwise. Aluminum conductors are
not permitted.
B. Use THWN conductors for underground and damp locations, THHN for dry areas.
C. Deliver conductors to the site in unbroken packages, marked with the manufacturer's name,
date of manufacture, voltage and classification letters. Use only wire recently manufactured
(10 months or less).
D. Provide signal service and low voltage control conductors as specified or noted on the
drawings.
E. No conductor supplying 120 volts or more will be smaller than No. 12 AWG unless otherwise
noted on the drawings.
F. Fixture wire to comply with latest requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters.
The carrying capacity of the wire as per the latest requirements of the National Electrical
Code. No fixture wire may be smaller than #18 gauge. Protect wiring with tape or tubing at
all points where abrasion is likely to occur.
G. Install all conductors of each electrical system in an approved raceway. Factory assemblies,
non-metallic/pliable/corrugated raceways, type UF cable or multi-conductor assemblies are
not approved.
H. Use solid conductor, size #10 AWG and smaller, stranded for #8 AWG and larger.
2.4 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:
Above grade level, provide galvanized junction and pull boxes with removable covers, secured with
machine screws. The sizes of all boxes determined by the number and size of conductors entering
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
260000 - 5
the box, and by the sizes of conduit terminating in the box. All boxes conform to the applicable
Electrical Safety Orders, State of California. Pullboxes flush with grade shall be concrete, with bolt
down concrete or steel covers, per plans, with engraved or beadweld identification.
2.5 OUTLET BOXES:
A. Provide galvanized outlet boxes and covers, one piece pressed steel, knockout fixture out-
lets equipped with 3/8" fixture studs and plaster rings.
B. Where standard boxes are not suitable, provide boxes of special design to fit space.
C. Cast aluminum or cast iron for outlet boxes exposed to weather, in damp locations, or
surface mounted with threaded hubs for conduit connections; cover made watertight with
gasket and non-ferrous screws.
D. Provide outlet boxes in plaster covered walls with raised covers or plaster rings to finish flush
with plaster.
2.6 NAMEPLATES:
Shall be micarta or lamacoid plate, 1/8" thick and have approved size, with beveled edges and
engraved white letters on black background. Provide nameplates for all items of electrical equipment
as well as circuits in the service distribution and power distribution panelboards; lighting distribution
panelboards; separately mounted motor starting switches; disconnect switches; motor control
pushbutton stations and other similar devices. Each nameplate as approved by the Architect. Use
two machine screws for attachment. Cement/adhesive is not approved.
3. PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 If construction of building reveals that any part of the Electrical Work would not be readily accessible
if installed according to drawings, notify the Architect before proceeding with such installation.
3.2 All concrete work such as pull boxes, raised pads, conduit envelopes and other areas where
affecting Electrical Work are the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
3.3 Coordinate layout and installation of electrical work with the overall construction schedule and work
schedules of various trades to prevent delay in completion of the project.
A. Verify dimensions and information regarding accurate location of equipment, structural
limitations, and finish with other affected sections.
B. Job Conditions:
The drawings do not always show offsets, bends, special fittings or junctions or pull boxes
necessary to meet job conditions. Provide the items as required at no cost to the Owner.
C. Weatherproof Equipment:
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
260000 - 6
Use weather resistant electrical devices or equipment located in damp, semi-exposed areas.
Comply with NEMA Type 3R requirements for enclosures.
D. Where devices are shown diagrammatically in the same location, neatly group them together
in a reasonable manner. Provide one-piece plate where such is manufactured.
3.4 Equipment requiring electrical under other sections is part of the Contract. Work includes all
necessary connections.
3.5 CONDUIT:
A. Install all conduit concealed, except where specifically indicated as exposed. Use rigid
galvanized steel or I.M.C. for all exposed conduit. Paint with two coats to match adjacent
surroundings, if viewed by the public.
B. Use galvanized rigid steel on all conduit installed in concrete and masonry walls, 3/4 inch
trade size minimum, unless otherwise specified and/or noted on the plans. Verify conduit
runs in concrete slab, prior to placement. Otherwise, do not run conduits in slabs.
C. All conduit installed in the dry walls or dry ceilings of the building structures, shall be steel
tube (EMT), except that in certain locations and for certain runs where it is impractical to
install EMT, and where permission to do so has been given by the City Inspector, galvanized
flexible steel conduit may be used, with a code sized ground conductor.
D. Run conduit so as not to interfere with or contact other piping, fixtures or equipment. Main-
tain 6" separation from water piping.
E. Cut the ends of all conduit square and carefully ream out to full size, and shoulder in fitting.
F. No running threads will be permitted in locations exposed to the weather, in concrete or
underground. Use special watertight union fittings in these locations.
G. Where conduit extends through roof to equipment on roof areas, provide weatherproofing as
specified in the appropriate section of these Specifications.
H. Support all conduit in intervals not less than 10'-0" and within 36 inches from any outlet and
at each side of bends and elbows. Use galvanized, concealed conduit supports, heavy
stamped, one hole malleable conduit clamps secured with nails. On exposed conduit
supports, use two hole clamps with screws, or galvanized steel framed channels secured by
screws may be used for conduit supports. Perforated iron for supporting conduit is not perm-
itted.
I. Use rigid galvanized steel or I.M.C., threaded, for exposed conduit runs. Install parallel or
perpendicular to walls, structural members or intersection of vertical plane and ceilings.
Avoid field made bends and offsets where possible. Do not install crushed or deformed
raceways.
J. Provide metal sleeves and install where conduit passes through masonry or concrete walls.
Use No. 20 gauge galvanized steel sleeves, no more than 1/2 inch greater in diameter than
the outside diameter of the conduit. Caulk conduit into sleeves with stone wool, Duseal or
Oakum and weatherproof below grade. Where conduit passes through fire resistive walls,
partitions, and floors, pack void spaces between conduits with U.S.G. Thermafiber or equal,
as approved by the State Fire Marshal.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
260000 - 7
K. Use factory-manufactured ells, except where noted otherwise. Field bends are permitted for
EMT conduit less than 1" diameter. Conduit radius for signal system is ten times the internal
diameter of the conduit.
L. Use watertight gland compression type connectors and couplings on fittings for thin wall
metallic conduit. Screw type or crimp type are not permitted.
3.6 OUTLET BOXES:
A. Attach outlet boxes on metal studs with TEC screws. Use wood screws for attachment on
wood studs. Nails are not acceptable.
B. Cover all boxes with outlet box protector, Appleton SB-CK or approved equal. Keep plaster
and dirt from entering box or panels. If plaster does get in, removed it prior to pulling in
wires.
C. Close all unused openings with plugs.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS:
A. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, do not install conductors of less than No. 12 AWG
size. For control conductors protected by 15 ampere or lower overcurrent protection, No. 14
AWG conductors will be installed. Where approved by Code, remote control and signal
circuits utilize No. 18 or No. 16 AWG sizes. Increase No. 12 to No. 10 AWG for 120 volt
home runs exceeding 75 feet.
B. Color code power wire and cable for feeders and branch circuits.
C. Install all electrical conductors, including signal and communications circuits in an approved
raceway.
D. Neatly group conductors in panels, switchgear and terminal cabinets, etc., and form in a
manner to fan into terminals with regular spacing. Lace formed groups of conductors with
No. 12 waxed twine, or Panduit Co. Nylon Straps Numbers "SST-4-H" or "SST-2". Lace
larger conductors with marlin and secure with cleats, or Panduit Co. Nylon Sta-Straps
Numbers "SSC-4-H" and tie anchors ETA-1, TA-2 or TM-1-2-3.
E. Install U.L. approved covered wire from all lighting fixture lamp sockets into outlet or junction
box.
3.8 WIRING COLOR CODE
A. 240/120 Volt System
Phase A - Black.
Phase A Switch Leg - Black with “S” tag.
Phase B - Red.
Phase B Switch Leg - Red with “S” tag.
Travelers - Yellow.
Neutral - White.
CITY OF DIAMOND BAR
DIAMOND BAR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS
260000 - 8
Equipment Ground - Green.
B. Provide identification tags on each conductor entering panel, switch, junction box and pull
box to identify conductor.
3.9 CONDUCTOR JOINTS AND TAPING:
Make joints in conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG with solderless, tapeless, wing nut type pressure
cable connector. Join conductors No. 6 AWG and larger together with approved type or pressure
connector and tape to provide insulation not less than that of the conductor. Make connections to
switch or bus bar with one-piece copper lugs for conductors No. 8 AWG or larger.
3.10 GROUNDING:
Provide grounding for entire electrical installation as required by the serving utility and codes
mentioned in these specifications. Including:
A. Conduit.
B. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system.
C. Power and lighting panelboards.
D. Non-current carrying metal parts or fixed equipment.
E. Electrical panels in separate buildings.
3.11 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Provide the following additional material and/or equipment to the owner at completion of project:
1. (2) two additional down light fixtures.
2. (10) ten additional linear soffit light fixtures
3. (10) ten additional relays
END OF SECTION
1293492.1 TP-3
APPENDIX